2012 kia forte owner's manual

7/29/2019 2012 Kia Forte Owner's Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/2012-kia-forte-owners-manual 1/353

kia, the company

Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.

As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality, value

for money prices, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you with a

customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.

All information contained in this Owner’s Manual is accurate at the

time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes

at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can be carried out.

This manual applies to all Kia models and includes descriptions and

explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result,

you may encounter material in this manual that is not applicable to

your specific Kia vehicle.

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!



i

Thank you for choosing a KIA vehicle.

When you require service, remember that your KIA Dealer knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech-nicians, recommended special tools, genuine KIA replacement parts and is dedicated to your complete satisfaction.

Because subsequent owners require this important informationas well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it issold.

This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup- plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual

that provides important information on all warranties regardingyour vehicle.

We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow therecommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operationof your new vehicle.

KIA offers a great variety of options, components and featuresfor its various models. Therefore, some of the equipmentdescribed in this manual, along with the various illustrations,may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manualwere accurate at the time of printing. KIA reserves the right todiscontinue or change specifications or design at any timewithout notice and without incurring any obligation. If youhave questions, always check with your KIA dealer.

We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your KIA vehicle.

© 2011 Kia Canada Inc.

All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by anyinformation storage and retrieval system or translation inwhole or part is not permitted without written authorizationfrom Kia Canada Inc..

Printed in Korea

Foreword



ii

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

I

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety features of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications & Consumer information

Index

table of contents



IIndex



Index

2I

Air cleaner ·····································································7-31

Airbag-supplemental restraint system ···························3-35

Appearance care·····························································7-59Audio system ·································································4-94

Automatic climate control system·································4-78

Automatic transaxle ·······················································5-15

Automatic transaxle fluid ··············································7-30

Battery············································································7-34

Before driving··································································5-3

Brake system··································································5-23

Brake/clutch fluid ··························································7-28

Bulb wattage ····································································8-2

Child restraint system ····················································3-27

Climate control air filter ················································7-32

Cruise control system ····················································5-33

Defroster ········································································4-67

Dimensions ······································································8-2

Door locks······································································4-12

Economical operation ····················································5-37

Emergency starting ··························································6-4

Emission control system················································7-65Engine compartment ·················································2-4/7-2

Engine coolant ·······························································7-25

Engine number·································································8-7

Engine oil·······································································7-24

ENGINE START/STOP button ·······································5-6

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ···············7-21

Fuel filler lid ··································································4-25

Fuel requirements ····························································1-3

Fuses ··············································································7-50

Hazard warning flasher··················································4-58

Hood···············································································4-23

How to use this manual ···················································1-2

If the engine overheats·····················································6-6

If the engine will not start ···············································6-3

If you have a flat tire ·······················································6-7

A E

F

H

I

B

C

D



1

How to use this manual / 1-2

Fuel requirements / 1-3

Vehicle break-in process / 1-4

Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-5

Introduction



Introduction

21

A010000AAM

We want to help you get the greatestpossible driving pleasure from your vehi-cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist youin many ways. We strongly recommendthat you read the entire manual. In orderto minimize the chance of death or injury,you must read the WARNING and CAU-TION sections in the manual.

Illustrations complement the words in thismanual to best explain how to enjoy yourvehicle. By reading your manual, you willlearn about features, important safetyinformation, and driving tips under vari-ous road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is pro-vided in the Table of Contents. Use theindex when looking for a specific area or

subject; it has an alphabetical listing of allinformation in your manual.

Sections: This manual has eight sectionsplus an index.Each section begins with abrief list of contents so you can tell at aglance if that section has the informationyou want.

You will find various WARNINGs,CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this manu-al. These WARNINGs were prepared to

enhance your personal safety.You shouldcarefully read and follow ALL proceduresand recommendations provided in theseWARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.

✽ NOTICEA NOTICE indicates interesting or help-ful information is being provided.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNINGA WARNING indicates a situation inwhich harm, serious bodily injury ordeath could result if the warning isignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the caution is ignored.



Introduction

41

A020104AUN

Use of MTBE

KIA recommends avoiding fuels contain-

ing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%weight) in your vehicle.

Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) mayreduce vehicle performance and producevapor lock or hard starting.

A020105AUN

Do not use methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-

hol) should not be used in your vehicle.This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-formance and damage components ofthe fuel system.

A020106AUN

Gasolines for cleaner air

To help contribute to cleaner air, KIA rec-ommends that you use gasolines treatedwith detergent additives, which help pre-vent deposit formation in the engine.

These gasolines will help the engine runcleaner and enhance performance of theEmission Control System.

A020107AUN

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle inanother country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding reg-istration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-able.

A030000AUN

No special break-in period is needed. Byfollowing a few simple precautions for thefirst 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add tothe performance, economy and life ofyour vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.• While driving, keep your engine speed

(rpm, or revolutions per minute)between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for longperiods of time, either fast or slow.Varying engine speed is needed toproperly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-erly.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3minutes at one time.

• Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000km (1,200 miles) of operation.

CAUTIONYour New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance problems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS



1 5

Introduction

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTERA050000ATD-EC

Seat belt warning light

High beam indicator

Turn signal indicator

ABS warning light

Parking brake & Brake fluidwarning light

Engine oil pressure warning light

Charging system warning light

ESC indicator*

ESC OFF indicator*

Malfunction indicator*

Air bag warning light*

Cruise indicator*

Cruise SET indicator*

Low fuel level warning light

❈ For more detailed explanations, refer to “Instrument cluster” in section 4.

Door ajar warning light

Trunk lid (or tailgate) openwarning light

Front fog light indicator*

Engine coolant temperaturewarning light*

Electric power steering (EPS)system warning light*

Shift pattern indicator

* : if equipped

ECOMINDERTM indicator*ECO

Immobilizer indicator




22

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

B010000ATD-EU

1. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-13

2. Outside rearview mirror control

switch*...............................................4-37

3. Power window lock button* ...............4-21

4. Central door lock switch* ..................4-13

5. Power window switches*...................4-20

6. Instrument panel illumination control

knob*.................................................4-40

7. ESC OFF button*..............................5-28

8. Front wiper deicer button*.................4-68

9. Steering wheel tilt lever* ...................4-33

10. Hood release lever .........................4-23

11. Clutch pedal* ....................................5-9

12. Brake pedal.....................................5-23

13. Accelerator pedal..............................5-9

14. Trunk lid release lever

(4 door, 2 door)...............................4-16

15. Fuel filler lid release lever...............4-25

* : if equipped

OTD019001N



2 3


INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

B020000ATD

OTDC019002N

1. Instrument cluster.............................4-39

2. Light control / Turn signals................4-59

3. Wiper/Washer ...................................4-63

4. Horn ..................................................4-34

5. Steering wheel audio control*...........4-95

6. Auto cruise control*...........................5-33

7. Driver’s air bag..................................3-47

8. Advanced lighting speaker switch* ...4-96

9. Steering wheel..................................4-32

10. Ignition switch* orENGINE START/STOP button*...5-4/5-6

11. Digital clock.....................................4-92

12. Hazard ......................................4-58/6-2

13. Audio* .............................................4-94

14. Climate control system ...................4-69

15. Shift lever................................5-12/5-15

16. Aux, USB and iPod port* ................4-97

17. Power outlet*...................................4-91

18. Seat warmer*...................... ..............3-7

19. Passenger’s air bag ........................3-4720. Glove box........................................4-88

* : if equipped




42

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-26

2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-24

3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir ..............7-28

4. Air cleaner.........................................7-31

5. Fuse box ...........................................7-50

6. Positive battery terminal ...................7-347. Negative battery terminal..................7-34

8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....7-30

9. Radiator cap .....................................7-27

10. Engine oil dipstick ...........................7-24

11. Power steering fluid reservoir*........7-29

* : if equipped

OTD071055N-1

B010000ATD

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.



3

Seat / 3-2

Seat belts / 3-15

Child restraint system / 3-27

Airbag-supplemental restraint system / 3-35




3 3


WARNING - Driver’s seat• Never attempt to adjust the seat

while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, andan accident causing death, seri-ous injury, or property damage.

• Do not allow anything to interferewith the normal position of theseatback. Storing items against aseatback or in any other wayinterfering with proper locking ofa seatback could result in seriousor fatal injury in a sudden stop orcollision.

• Always drive and ride with yourseatback upright and the lap por-tion of the seat belt snug and lowacross the hips. This is the bestposition to protect you in case ofan accident.

• In order to avoid unnecessaryand perhaps severe air baginjuries, always sit as far back aspossible from the steering wheelwhile maintaining comfortablecontrol of the vehicle. It is recom-mended that your chest is at least250 mm (10 inches) away fromthe steering wheel.

WARNING - Uprightingseat

When you return the seatback to itsupright position, hold the seatbackand return it slowly and be sure

there are no other occupantsaround the seat. If the seatback isreturned without being held andcontrolled, the back of the seatcould spring forward resulting inaccidental injury to a person struckby the seatback.

WARNING - Loose objectsLoose objects in the driver’s footarea could interfere with the opera-tion of the foot pedals, possiblycausing an accident. Do not placeanything under the front seats.

WARNING - Driver respon-sibility for front seat pas-senger

Riding in a vehicle with a front seat-back reclined could lead to seriousor fatal injury in an accident. If afront seat is reclined during anaccident, the occupant’s hips mayslide under the lap portion of theseat belt applying great force to theunprotected abdomen. TheProtection of your restraint system(seat belt and air bags) is greatlyreduced by reclining your seat.Serious or fatal internal injuriescould result.The driver must advisethe front passenger to keep theseatback in an upright positionwhenever the vehicle is in motion.




43

Front seat adjustment

C010101AHMForward and backward

To move the seat forward or backward:

1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever upand hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position youdesire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseat is locked in place.

Adjust the seat before driving, and make

sure the seat is locked securely by tryingto move forward and backward withoutusing the lever. If the seat moves, it is notlocked properly.

C010102AHM

Seatback angle To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up theseatback recline lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat andadjust the seatback of the seat to theposition you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseatback is locked in place. (The leverMUST return to its original position forthe seatback to lock.)

OTD039003OTD039002

WARNINGAfter adjusting the seat, alwayscheck that it is securely locked intoplace by attempting to move theseat forward or reverse withoutusing the lock release lever.Sudden or unexpected movementof the driver's seat could cause youto lose control of the vehicle result-ing in an accident.



3 5


C010103APB

Seat height (for driver’s seat) (if equipped)

To change the height of the seat, movethe lever upwards or downwards.

To lower the seat cushion, push downthe lever several times.

• To raise the seat cushion, pull up thelever several times.

C010104BPB

Headrest The driver's and front passenger's seatsare equipped with a headrest for theoccupant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfortfor the driver and front passenger, butalso helps protect the head and neck inthe event of a collision.

WARNING• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrestshould be adjusted so the middleof the headrest is at the sameheight of the center of gravity ofan occupant's head. Generally,the center of gravity of most peo-ple's head is similar with theheight of the top of their eyes.Also, adjust the headrest as closeto your head as possible. For thisreason, the use of a cushion thatholds the body away from the

seatback is not recommended.• Do not operate the vehicle with

the headrests removed as severeinjury to the occupants mayoccur in the event of an accident.Headrests may provide protec-tion against neck injuries whenproperly adjusted.

• Do not adjust the headrest heightwhile the vehicle is in motion.

OMG038400OTD039004




63

Forward and backward adjustment

The headrest may be adjusted forward to3 different positions by pulling the head-rest forward to the desired detent. Toadjust the headrest to it’s furthest back-wards position, pull it fully forward to thefarthest position and release it. Adjust theheadrest so that it properly supports thehead and neck.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).

Removal

To remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button (1)while pulling the headrest upward (2).

OTD039006OTD039005 OTD039007



3 7


Reinstall

To reinstall the headrest, put the head-rest poles (3) into the holes while press-ing the release button (2).Then adjust (1)it to the appropriate height.

Active headrest (if equipped)

The active headrest is designed to moveforward and upward during a rear impact.This helps to prevent the driver's andfront passenger’s head from movingbackward and thus helps prevent neckinjuries.

C010107ATD

Seat warmer (if equipped)

The seat warmers are provided to warmthe front seats during cold weather. Withthe ignition switch in the ON position,push either of the switches to warm thedriver's seat or the front passenger'sseat.

During mild weather or under conditionswhere the operation of the seat warmeris not needed, keep the switches in theOFF position.

WARNINGMake sure the headrest locks inposition after adjusting it to proper-ly protect the occupants.

OTD039008 HNF2041-1 OTD031009

WARNINGA gap between the seat and theheadrest release button mayappear when seating on the seat orwhen you push or pull the seat. Becareful not to get your finger, etc.caught in the gap.




83

✽ NOTICEWith the seat warmer switch in the ONposition, the heating system in the seatturns off or on automatically dependingon the seat temperature.

C010110ATD

Rear seat entry(for 2door vehicle only)

The front passenger's seatback shouldbe tilted to enter the rear seat.

OTD039042N

CAUTION When cleaning the seats, do not

use an organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seat warmer, do not place anything on

the seats that insulates against heat, such as blankets, cushions or seat covers while the seat warmer is in operation.

• Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers. Damage to the seat warming components could occur.

WARNING - Seat warmerburns

Passengers should use extremecaution when using seat warmersdue to the possibility of excessheating or burns. The seat warmermay cause burns even at low tem-peratures, especially if used forlong periods of time. In particular,the driver must exercise extremecare for the following types of pas-sengers:

1. Infants, children, elderly or hand-icapped persons, or hospital out-patients

2. Persons with sensitive skin orthose that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals

4. Intoxicated individuals

5. Individuals taking medicationthat can cause drowsiness orsleepiness (sleeping pills, coldtablets, etc.)



3 9


By pulling up the walk-in seat lever (2) onthe back of the front passenger’s seat-back, the seatback will tilt forward. Thenpush the seat forward to allow the occu-

pants to enter.

By pulling up the seatback, the seatbackwill recline and return to the original posi-tion.

C010108ATD-EC

Seatback pocket (if equipped)

The seatback pocket is provided on theback of the front passenger’s seatback.

Rear seat adjustment

C010307ATD

Folding the rear seat (if equipped)

The rear seatbacks may be folded tofacilitate carrying long items or toincrease the luggage capacity of thevehicle.

WARNING - Seatbackpocket

Do not put heavy or sharp objectsin the seatback pocket. In an acci-dent they could come loose fromthe pocket and injure vehicle occu-pants.

OMG039017WARNING

Never attempt to adjust the seatwhile the vehicle is moving or whenthe passenger's seat is occupied asthe seat may suddenly move andinjure the passenger.

WARNINGThe purpose of the fold-down rearseatbacks is to allow you to carrylonger objects that could not beaccommodated in the luggage area.

Never allow passengers sit on topof the folded down seatback whilethe vehicle is moving. This is not aproper seating position and no seatbelts are available for use. Thiscould result in serious injury ordeath in case of an accident or sud-den stop. Objects carried on thefolded down seatback should notextend higher than the top of thefront seatbacks. Doing this could

allow cargo to slide forward andcause injury or damage during sud-den stops.




103

To fold the rear seatback :

■ 4 door, 2 door vehicle

1. Set the front seatback to the uprightposition and if necessary slide thefront seat forward.

2. Lower the rear headrest to the lowestposition.

3. Open the trunk.

4. Pull out the lock release knob.

5. Fold the seatback forward and downfirmly.

6. To use the rear seat, lift and push theseatback backward firmly until it clicksinto place.

7. Return the rear seat belt to the properposition.

✽ NOTICEIf the seat belt locks after unfolding therear seatback, pull out the locked seatbelt, release it then pull it out again.

OHD036025

OHD036118

OHD036119



3 11


■ 5 door vehicle

1. Set the front seatback to the uprightposition and if necessary, slide thefront seat forward.

2. Pull the cushion folding strap (1) andlift the front portion of the seat cushion.

3. Lift the rear portion of the seat cush-ion. Stand the rear seat cushion verti-cally.

4. Remove the headrest from the rearseatback.

5. Stow the headrest by inserting theheadrest poles into the holder on thebottom of the seat cushion.

6. Pull the lock release lever (red visible)and fold the rear seatback forward anddown firmly.

OTD031105

OTD031106

OFD037008

OTD031107

OTD031108



3 13


C010303APB

Headrest (if equipped)


The rear seat(s) is equipped with head-

rests in the outboard seating positions forthe occupant's safety and comfort.

■ 5 door vehicle

The rear seat is equipped with headrestsin all the seating positions for the occu-pant's safety and comfort.

The headrest not only provides comfortfor passengers, but also helps protect thehead and neck in the event of a collision.

WARNING• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrest

should be adjusted so the middleof the headrest is at the sameheight of the center of gravity ofan occupant's head. Generally,the center of gravity of most peo-ple's head is similar with theheight of the top of their eyes.Also adjust the headrest as closeto your head as possible. For thisreason, the use of a cushion thatholds the body away from the

seatback is not recommended.• Do not operate the vehicle with

the headrests removed as severeinjury to an occupant may occurin the event of an accident.Headrests may provide protec-tion against severe neck injurieswhen properly adjusted.

WARNING - CargoCargo should always be secured toprevent it from being thrown about

the vehicle in a collision and caus-ing injury to the vehicle occupants.Do not place objects in the rearseats, since they cannot be proper-ly secured and may hit the frontseat occupants in a frontal colli-sion.

WARNING - Cargo loading

Make sure the engine is off, theautomatic transaxle is in P (Park)or the manual transaxle is inReverse or 1st, and the parkingbrake is securely applied wheneverloading or unloading cargo. Failureto take these steps may allow thevehicle to move if the shift lever isinadvertently moved to anotherposition.




143

Adjusting the height up and down(if equipped)

To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).

Removal

To remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button(1) while pulling the headrest upward (2).

To reinstall the headrest, put the head-rest poles (3) into the holes while press-ing the release button (1). Then adjust itto the appropriate height.

C010304ATD

Armrest (if equipped)

To use the armrest, pull it forward fromthe seatback.

OTD039010OMG039037

WARNINGMake sure the headrest locks inposition after adjusting it to proper-

ly protect the occupants.

OMG035036



3 17


C020102ATD-EU

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system

with emergency locking retractor To fasten your seat belt:

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of theretractor and insert the metal tab (1) intothe buckle (2). There will be an audible"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to theproper length only after the lap belt por-tion is adjusted manually so that it fitssnugly around your hips. If you lean for-ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt willextend and let you move around. If thereis a sudden stop or impact, however, thebelt will lock into position. It will also lockif you try to lean forward too quickly.

✽ NOTICEIf you are not able to pull out the seatbelt from the retractor, firmly pull thebelt out and release it. Then you will be

able to pull the belt out smoothly.

Height adjustment (if equipped)

You can adjust the height of the shoulderbelt anchor to one of the 4 positions formaximum comfort and safety.

The height of the adjusting seat beltshould not be too close to your neck. Theshoulder portion should be adjusted sothat it lies across your chest and midwayover your shoulder near the door and notyour neck.

To adjust the height of the seat beltanchor, lower or raise the height adjusterinto an appropriate position.

B180A01NF

1

2

OMG035038





183

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).To lower it, push it down (3) while press-ing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor

into position. Try sliding the heightadjuster to make sure that it has lockedinto position.

C020106AUN

Seat belts - Front passenger and rear seat 3-point system with combination locking retractor

To fasten your seat belt:Combination retractor type seat belts areinstalled in the rear seat positions to helpaccommodate the installation of childrestraint systems. Although a combina-tion retractor is also installed in the frontpassenger seat position, it is stronglyrecommended that children always beseated in the rear seat. NEVER placeany infant restraint system in the frontseat of the vehicle.

This type of seat belt combines the fea-tures of both an emergency lockingretractor seat belt and an automatic lock-ing retractor seat belt. To fasten your seatbelt, pull it out of the retractor and insertthe metal tab into the buckle. There willbe an audible "click" when the tab locksinto the buckle. When not securing achild restraint, the seat belt operates inthe same way as the driver's seat belt(Emergency Locking Retractor Type). It

automatically adjusts to the proper lengthonly after the lap belt portion of the seatbelt is adjusted manually so that it fitssnugly around your hips.

WARNING• Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appro-priate height. Never position theshoulder belt across your neck orface. Improperly positioned seat

belts can cause serious injuriesin an accident.

• Failure to replace seat belts afteran accident could leave you withdamaged seat belts that will notprovide protection in the event ofanother collision leading to per-sonal injury or death. Replaceyour seat belts after being in anaccident as soon as possible.

B200A01NF

WARNINGYou should place the lap belt por-tion as low as possible and snuglyacross your hips,not on your waist.If the lap belt is located too high onyour waist, it may increase thechance of injury in the event of acollision. Both arms should not beunder or over the belt. Rather, oneshould be over and the other under,as shown in the illustration.

Never wear the seat belt under thearm that is near the door.




3 19


When the seat belt is fully extended fromthe retractor to allow the installation of achild restraint system, the seat belt oper-ation changes to allow the belt to retract,

but not to extend (Automatic LockingRetractor Type). Refer to “Using a childrestraint system” in this section.

✽ NOTICEAlthough the combination retractorprovides the same level of protection forseated passengers in either emergencyor automatic locking modes, it is recom-mended that seated passengers use theemergency locking feature for improved

convenience. The automatic lockingfunction is intended to facilitate childrestraint installation. To convert fromthe automatic locking feature to theemergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fullyretract.

When using the rear center seat belt, thebuckle with the “CENTER” mark must be

used. (if equipped)

OBH038023N

CAUTIONDo NOT fold down the left portion of the rear seat back when the rear

center seat belt is buckled. ALWAYS UNBUCKLE the rear center seat belt before folding down the left portion of the rear seat back. If the rear center seat belt is buckled when the left portion of the rear seat back is folded down, distortion and damage to the top portion of the seat back and seat belt garnish may result, causing the seat back to lock into the folded down position.





203

To release the seat belt:

The seat belt is released by pressing the

release button (1) of the locking buckle.When it is released, the belt should auto-matically draw back into the retractor.

If this does not happen, check the belt tobe sure it is not twisted, then try again.

C020200ATD-EC

Pre-tensioner seat belt

(if equipped)Your vehicle is equipped with driver's andfront passenger's pre-tensioner seatbelts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner isto make sure that the seat belts fit tightlyagainst the occupant's body in certainfrontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seatbelts may be activated in crashes, wherethe frontal collision is severe enough.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or ifthe occupant tries to lean forward tooquickly, the seat belt retractor will lockinto position. In certain frontal collisions,

the pre-tensioner will activate and pullthe seat belt into tighter contact againstthe occupant's body.

If the system senses excessive seat belttension on the driver or passenger's seatbelt when the pre-tensioner activates, theload limiter inside the pre-tensioner willrelease some of the pressure on theaffected seat belt. (if equipped)OED030300B210A01NF-1

WARNING• Do not put anything near the

buckle. Placing objects near thebuckle can adversely affect thebuckle pre-tensioner and mayincrease the risk of personalinjury in the event of a collision.

• For your safety, be sure that thebelt webbing is not loose or twist-ed and always sit properly onyour seat.



y y

223

✽ NOTICEBecause the sensor that activates theSRS air bag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag

warning light ( ) on the instrumentpanel will illuminate for approximately6 seconds after the ignition switch hasbeen turned to the ON position, andthen it should turn off.

CAUTIONIf the pre-tensioner seat belt does not work properly, this warning light

will illuminate even if the SRS air bag has not malfunctioned. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, or if it remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds,or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven,please have an authorized KIA dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt or SRS air bag system as soon

as possible.

WARNING• Pre-tensioners are designed to

operate only one time. After acti-

vation, pre-tensioner seat beltsmust be replaced. All seat belts,of any type, should always bereplaced after they have beenworn during a collision.

• The pre-tensioner seat beltassembly mechanisms becomehot during activation. Do nottouch the pre-tensioner seat beltassemblies for several minutesafter they have been activated.

• Do not attempt to inspect orreplace the pre-tensioner seatbelts yourself.This must be doneby an authorized KIA dealer.

• Do not strike the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies.

(Continued)



243

✽ NOTICESmall children are best protected frominjury in an accident when properlyrestrained in the rear seat by a child

restraint system that meets the require-ments of the safety standards of yourcountry. Before buying any childrestraint system, make sure that it has alabel certifying that it meets the safetystandards of your country. The restraintmust be appropriate for your child'sheight and weight. Check the label onthe child restraint for this information.Refer to “Child restraint system” in thissection.

C020301AHM

Larger children

Children who are too large for childrestraint systems should always occupy

the rear seat and use the availablelap/shoulder belts.The lap portion shouldbe fastened and snugged on the hipsand as low as possible. Check if the beltfits periodically. A child's squirming couldput the belt out of position. Children aregiven the most safety in the event of anaccident when they are restrained by aproper restraint system in the rear seat. Ifa larger child (over age 12) must be seat-ed in the front seat, the child should be

securely restrained by the availablelap/shoulder belt and the seat should beplaced in the rearmost position. Childrenage 12 and under should be restrainedsecurely in the rear seat. NEVER place achild age 12 and under in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-es the child’s neck or face, try placing thechild closer to the center of the vehicle. Ifthe shoulder belt still touches their face

or neck they need to be returned to achild restraint system.

WARNING - Shoulder beltson small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt comein contact with a child’s neck orface while the vehicle is inmotion.

• If seat belts are not properly wornand adjusted on children, there isa risk of death or serious injury.




3 25

C020302AKM

Restraint of pregnant women

Pregnant women should wear lap/shoul-der belt assemblies whenever possible

according to specific recommendationsby their doctors. The lap portion of thebelt should be worn AS SNUGLY ANDLOW AS POSSIBLE.

C020303AUN

Injured person

A seat belt should be used when aninjured person is being transported.

When this is necessary, you should con-sult a physician for recommendations.

C020304AUN

One person per belt

Two people (including children) shouldnever attempt to use a single seat belt.This could increase the severity ofinjuries in case of an accident.

C020305APB

Do not lie down

To reduce the chance of injuries in theevent of an accident and to achieve maxi-mum effectiveness of the restraint system,all passengers should be sitting up andthe front seats should be in an uprightposition when the vehicle is moving. Aseat belt cannot provide proper protectionif the person is lying down in the rear seator if the front seat is in a reclined position.

WARNINGRiding with a reclined seatbackincreases your chance of serious

or fatal injuries in the event of a col-lision or sudden stop. The protec-tion of your restraint system (seatbelts and air bags) is greatlyreduced by reclining your seat.Seat belts must be snugged againstyour hips and chest to work proper-ly. The more the seatback isreclined, the greater the chancethat an occupant's hips will slideunder the lap belt causing serious

internal injuries. Also, the shoulderbelt may strike the occupant'sneck. Drivers and passengersshould always sit well back in theirseats, properly belted, and with theseatbacks upright.

WARNING - Pregnantwomen

Pregnant women must never placethe lap portion of the safety beltover the area of the abdomen

where the fetus is located or abovethe abdomen where the belt couldcrush the fetus during an impact.



3 27

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMC030000ATD-EC

Children riding in the car should sit in therear seat and must always be properlyrestrained to minimize the risk of injury in

an accident, sudden stop or suddenmaneuver. According to accident statis-tics, children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seats than in thefront seat. Larger children who are not ina child restraint should use one of theseat belts provided.

You should be aware of the specificrequirements in your country. Child and/orinfant safety seats must be properlyplaced and installed in the rear seat. You

must use a commercially available childrestraint system that meets the require-ments of the Safety Standards of yourcountry.

Child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by seat belt, or bya tether anchor and/or LATCH anchors (ifequipped).

Children could be injured or killed in acrash if their restraints are not properlysecured. For small children and babies, achild seat or infant seat must be used.

Before buying a particular child restraintsystem, make sure it fits your vehicleseat and seat belts, and fits your child.Follow all the instructions provided by themanufacturer when installing the childrestraint system.

WARNING• A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Neverinstall a child or infant seat on thefront passenger's seat. Should anaccident occur and cause thepassenger-side air bag to deploy,it could severely injure or kill aninfant or child seated in an infantor child seat. Thus only use achild restraint in the rear seat ofyour vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• A seat belt or child restraint sys-tem can become very hot if it isleft in a closed vehicle on a sunny

day, even if the outside tempera-ture does not feel hot. Be sure tocheck the seat cover and bucklesbefore placing a child there.

• When the child restraint systemis not in use, store it in the lug-gage area or fasten it with a seatbelt so that it will not be thrownforward in case of a sudden stopor an accident.

• Children may be seriously injuredor killed by an inflating air bag.All children, even those too largefor child restraints, must ride inthe rear seat.



3 29

C030100AHM-EU

Using a child restraint system

For small children and babies, the use ofa child seat or infant seat is required.This

child seat or infant seat should be ofappropriate size for the child and shouldbe installed in accordance with the man-ufacturer's instructions.

For safety reasons, we recommend thatthe child restraint system be used in therear seats.

Since all passenger seat belts movefreely under normal conditions and onlylock under extreme or emergency condi-tions (emergency lock mode), you mustmanually change these seat belts to theauto lock mode to secure a child

restraint.

WARNING - Child seatinstallation

• A child can be seriously injured

or killed in a collision if the childrestraint is not properly anchoredto the car and the child is notproperly restrained in the childrestraint. Before installing thechild restraint system, read theinstructions supplied by the childrestraint system manufacturer.

• If the seat belt does not operateas described in this section, havethe system checked immediately

by your authorized KIA dealer.• Failure to observe this manual's

instructions regarding childrestraint system and the instruc-tions provided with the childrestraint system could increasethe chance and/or severity ofinjury in an accident.

WARNINGNever place a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger

seat, because of the danger that aninflating passenger-side air bagcould impact the rear-facing childrestraint and kill the child.

CRS09

OTQ037038

Rearward-facing child restraint system

Forward-facing child restraint system



323

C030103ATD

Securing a child restraint seat with

tether anchorage system (if equipped)

Child restraint hook holders are locatedon the shelf behind the rear seats.

1. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.

For vehicles with adjustable headrest,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap overthe top of the seatback.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to theappropriate child restraint hook holderand tighten to secure the child restraintseat.

OTD039033L

OTD039032L

WARNING - Tether strapNever mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point. Theincreased load caused by multipleseats may cause the tethers oranchorage points to break, causingserious injury or death.

WARNINGA child can be seriously injured orkilled in a collision if the childrestraint is not properly anchoredto the car and the child is not prop-erly restrained in the child restraint.Always follow the child seat manu-facturer’s instructions for installa-tion and use.

Tether Anchor Cover Child Restraint Hook

Holder

Child Restraint Hook Holders

Tether Strap Hook

Front of Vehicle




3 33

C030104AHM-EU

Securing a child restraint seat with

child seat lower anchor system Some child seat manufacturers makechild restraint seats that are labeled asLATCH or LATCH-compatible childrestraint seats. LATCH stands for "LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children". Theseseats include two rigid or webbingmounted attachments that connect totwo LATCH anchors at specific seatingpositions in your vehicle. This type ofchild restraint seat eliminates the need to

use seat belts to attach the child seat inthe rear seats.

Child restraint symbols are located onthe left and right rear seat backs to indi-

cate the position of the lower anchors forchild restraints.

WARNING - Child restraintcheck

Check that the child restraint sys-

tem is secure by pushing andpulling it in different directions.Incorrectly fitted child restraintsmay swing, twist, tip or separatecausing death or serious injury.

WARNING- Child restraint anchorage

• Child restraint anchorages are

designed to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fittedchild restraints. Under no circum-stances are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses orfor attaching other items orequipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not workproperly if attached somewhereother than the correct tetheranchor.

B230D01NF OTD039038N

Lower AnchorPosition Indicator

Lower Anchor




343

LATCH anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The LATCH anchors are

located in the left and right outboard rearseating positions. Their locations areshown in the illustration. There is noLATCH anchor provided for the centerrear seating position.

The LATCH anchors are located betweenthe seatback and the seat cushion of therear seat left and right outboard seatingpositions.

Follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions to properly install child

restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the LATCH childrestraint, assure that the seat is properlyattached to the LATCH and tetheranchors.

Also, test the child restraint seat beforeyou place the child in it. Tilt the seat fromside to side. Also try to tug the seat for-ward. Check to see if the anchors holdthe seat in place.

WARNINGIf the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child beingseriously injured or killed in a colli-sion greatly increases.

WARNING - LATCH loweranchors

LATCH lower anchors are only tobe used with the left and right rearoutboard seating positions. Never

attempt to attach a LATCHequipped seat in the center seatingposition. You may damage theanchors or the anchors may failand break in a collision.

CAUTIONDo not allow the rear seat belt webbing to get scratched or pinched by the child-seat latch and LATCH anchor during installation.

WARNINGWhen using the vehicle's "LATCH"system to install a child restraint

system in the rear seat, all unusedvehicle rear seat belt metal latchplates or tabs must be latchedsecurely in their seat belt bucklesand the seat belt webbing must beretracted behind the child restraintto prevent the child from reachingand taking hold of unretracted seatbelts. Unlatched metal latch platesor tabs may allow the child to reachthe unretracted seat belts whichmay result in strangulation and aserious injury or death to the childin the child restraint.

WARNINGInstall the child restraint seat fullyrearward against the seatback withthe seatback reclined two positionsfrom the most upright latched posi-tion.

OTD039037N




3 35

C040000AUN-C1

(1) Driver’s front air bag

(2) Passenger’s front air bag

(3) Side impact air bag*

(4) Curtain air bag** : if equipped

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

OMG039025

* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

WARNINGEven in vehicles with air bags, youand your passengers must alwayswear the safety belts provided inorder to minimize the risk andseverity of injury in the event of acollision or rollover.




363

C040900ATD

How does the air bag systemoperate

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if

necessary) only when the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON or STARTposition.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the event ofserious frontal or side collision (ifequipped with side air bag or curtainair bag) in order to help protect theoccupants from serious physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which theair bags will inflate.

Generally, air bags are designed to

inflate based upon the severity of a col-lision and its direction. These two fac-tors determine whether the sensorsproduce an electronic deployment/ inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on anumber of complex factors includingvehicle speed, angles of impact andthe density and stiffness of the vehi-cles or objects which your vehicle hitsin the collision. The determining, fac-

tors are not limited to those mentionedabove.

• The front air bags will completelyinflate and deflate in an instant.

It is virtually impossible for you to seethe air bags inflate during an accident.It is much more likely that you will sim-ply see the deflated air bags hangingout of their storage compartments after

the collision.• In order to help provide protection in a

severe collision, the air bags mustinflate rapidly. The speed of air baginflation is a consequence of extremelyshort time in which a collision occursand the need to get the air bagbetween the occupant and the vehiclestructures before the occupant impactsthose structures. This speed of inflationreduces the risk of serious or life-

threatening injuries in a severe collisionand is thus a necessary part of air bagdesign.

However, air bag inflation can alsocause injuries which can include facialabrasions, bruises and broken bonesbecause the inflation speed also caus-es the air bags to expand with a greatdeal of force.

• There are even circumstancesunder which contact with the steer-ing wheel air bag can cause fatalinjuries, especially if the occupantis positioned excessively close tothe steering wheel.

WARNING• To avoid severe personal injury

or death caused by deploying air

bags in a collision, the drivershould sit as far back from thesteering wheel air bag as possi-ble (at least 250 mm (10 inches)away). The front passengershould always move their seat asfar back as possible and sit backin their seat.

• Air bags inflate instantly in anevent of a collision, passengersmay be injured by the air bag

expansion force if they are not ina proper position.

• Air bag inflation may causeinjuries including facial or bodilyabrasions, injuries from brokenglasses or burns.




3 37

C040902APB

Noise and smoke

When the air bags inflate, they make aloud noise and they leave smoke andpowder in the air inside of the vehicle.This is normal and is a result of the igni-tion of the air bag inflator. After the airbag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-comfort in breathing due to the contact ofyour chest to both the seat belt and theair bag, as well as from breathing thesmoke and powder. Open your doorsand/or windows as soon as possibleafter the impact in order to reduce dis-comfort and prevent prolonged expo-sure to smoke and powder.

Though smoke and powder are non-toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin(eyes, nose and throat etc). If this is thecase, wash and rinse with the cold waterimmediately and consult the doctor if thesymptom persists.

C040903AUN

Installing a child restraint on a front

passenger’s seat is forbidden Never place a rear-facing child restraintin the front passenger’s seat. If the airbag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-ing child restraint, causing serious orfatal injury.

In addition, do not place front-facing childrestraint in the front passenger’s seateither. If the front passenger air baginflates, it would cause serious or fatalinjuries to the child.

1JBH3051

WARNINGWhen the air bags deploy, the airbag related parts in the steering

wheel and/or instrument paneland/or in both sides of the roof railsabove the front and rear doors arevery hot. To prevent injury, do nottouch the air bag storage area’sinternal components immediatelyafter an air bag has inflated.




383

C041000AEN

Air bag warning light

The purpose of the air bag warning lightin your instrument panel is to alert you ofa potential problem with your air bag -Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turned ON,the indicator light should illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds, then go off.

Have the system checked if:

• The light does not turn on briefly whenyou turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminating forapproximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while the vehicle isin motion.

C040100BTD-EU

SRS components and functions

The SRS consists of the following com-ponents:

1. Driver's front air bag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module

3. Side impact air bag modules*

4. Curtain air bag modules*

5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies*

6. Anchor pre-tensioner assemblies*

7. Air bag warning light

8. SRS control module (SRSCM)

9. Front impact sensors10. Side impact sensors*

11. PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indi-cator (Front passenger’s seat only)

12. Occupant detection system(Front passenger’s seat only)

WARNING• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restraint ona seat protected by an air bag infront of it!

• Never put a child restraint in thefront passenger’s seat. If the frontpassenger air bag inflates, it cancause serious or fatal injuries.

• When children are seated in therear outboard seats of a vehicleequipped with side and/or curtainair bags, be sure to install thechild restraint system as far away

from the door side as possible,and securely lock the childrestraint system in position.

Inflation of side and/or curtain airbags could cause serious injuryor death to an infant or child.

W7-147 OTD030040N




3 39

13. Driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt buckle sensors

*: if equipped

The SRSCM continually monitors allSRS components while the ignitionswitch is ON to determine if a crashimpact is severe enough to require airbag deployment or pre-tensioner seatbelt deployment.

The SRS air bag warning light on theinstrument panel will illuminate for about6 seconds after the ignition switch isturned to the ON position, after which the

air bag warning light should go out.

The air bag modules are located both inthe center of the steering wheel and in

the front passenger's panel above theglove box. When the SRSCM detects asufficiently severe impact to the front ofthe vehicle, it will automatically deploythe front air bags.

Upon deployment, tear seams moldeddirectly into the pad covers will separate

under pressure from the expansion of theair bags. Further opening of the coversthen allows full inflation of the air bags.

B240B01L

Driver’s front air bag (1)

B240B02L

Driver’s front air bag (2)

WARNINGIf any of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionof the SRS. Have an authorized KIAdealer inspect the air bag systemas soon as possible.

• The light does not turn on brieflywhen you turn the ignition ON.

• The light stays on after illuminat-ing for approximately 6 seconds.

• The light comes on while thevehicle is in motion.



3 41

C040300ATD

Occupant detection system

Your vehicle is equipped with an occu-pant detection system in the front pas-senger's seat.

The occupant detection system isdesigned to detect the presence of aproperly-seated front passenger anddetermine if the passenger's front air bagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.The driver's front air bag is not affectedor controlled by the occupant detectionsystem.

(Continued)

• The SRS can function only whenthe ignition key is in the ON posi-tion. If the SRS air bag warning

light does not illuminate, or con-tinuously remains on after illumi-nating for about 6 seconds whenthe ignition switch is turned tothe ON position, or after theengine is started, comes on whiledriving, the SRS is not workingproperly. If this occurs, have yourvehicle immediately inspected byan authorized KIA dealer.

• Before you replace a fuse or dis-

connect a battery terminal, turnthe ignition switch to the LOCKposition and remove the ignitionkey. Never remove or replace theair bag related fuse(s) when theignition switch is in the ON posi-tion. Failure to heed this warningwill cause the SRS air bag warn-ing light to illuminate.

WARNING• If an air bag deploys, there may

be a loud noise followed by a finedust released in the vehicle.These conditions are normal andare not hazardous - the air bagsare packed in this fine powder.The dust generated during airbag deployment may cause skinor eye irritation as well as aggra-vate asthma for some persons.Always wash all exposed skinareas thoroughly with lukewarmwater and a mild soap after anaccident in which the air bags

were deployed.(Continued)

OTD031041N



3 43

WARNINGRiding in an improper position orplacing weight on the front passen-ger's seat when it is unoccupied bya passenger adversely affects theoccupant detection system (ODS).

(Continued)

C040301ATD

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system

*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in

the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child dependingon his/her physique and posture.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat.When a smaller child thanthe same age sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/heras an infant depending on his/her physique or posture.

*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

*4) The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the frontpassenger seat. This is a normal condition.

Condition detected by the occupant

detection system

1. Adult *1 or child age 13 and up*2

2. Infant or child restraint system

with 12 months old*3 *4

3. Unoccupied

4. Malfunction in the system

Off

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Activated

PASSENGER AIR

BAG “OFF” indica-

tor light

SRS warninglight

Front passengerair bag

Indicator/Warning light Devices




443

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with the hips shiftedtowards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the door or centerconsole.

- Never sit on one side of the frontpassenger seat.

- Never place the feet on the dash-board.

B990A08O

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load in thefront passenger seat.

- Never excessively recline thefront passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N- Never place the feet on the front

passenger seatback.

(Continued)




3 45

When an adult is seated in the front pas-senger seat, if the PASSENGER AIRBAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn the igni-tion switch to the LOCK position and askthe passenger to sit properly (sittingupright with the seat back in an uprightposition, centered on the seat cushionwith their seat belt on, legs comfortablyextended and their feet on the floor).Restart the engine and have the personremain in that position.This will allow thesystem to detect the person and toenable the passenger air bag.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indi-cator is still on, ask the passenger tomove to the rear seat.

✽ NOTICEThe PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-onds after the ignition switch is turned

to the ON position or after the engine isstarted. If the front passenger seat isoccupied, the occupant detection sensorwill then classify the front passengerafter several more seconds.

B990A01O

WARNINGDo not allow an adult passenger toride in the front seat when the PAS-SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicatoris illuminated, because the air bagwill not deploy in the event of acrash. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG“OFF” indicator remains illuminat-ed after the passenger repositionsthemselves properly and the car isrestarted, it is recommended that

passenger move to the rear seatbecause the passenger's front airbag will not deploy.

Front seat passengers must stayproperly seated to avoid seriousinjury from a deploying air bag.

WARNINGDo not put a heavy load in the frontpassenger seat. Do not place anyitems under the front passengerseat. Any of these could interferewith proper sensor operation.



3 47

C040400AAM-EU

Driver's and passenger's front airbagYour vehicle is equipped with anAdvanced Supplemental Restraint (AirBag) System and lap/shoulder belts atboth the driver and passenger seatingposition.

The indications of the system's presenceare the letters "AIR BAG" embossed onthe air bag pad cover in the steeringwheel and the passenger's side frontpanel pad above the glove box.

The SRS consists of air bags installedunder the pad covers in the center of thesteering wheel and the passenger's sidefront panel above the glove box.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passen-ger with additional protection than thatoffered by the seat belt system alone incase of a frontal impact of sufficientseverity. The SRS uses sensors to gath-

er information about the driver's seatposition, the driver's and front passen-ger's seat belt usage and impact severi-ty.

WARNINGIf the occupant detection system isnot working properly, the SRS airbag warning light on the instru-

ment panel will illuminate becausethe passenger's front air bag isconnected with the occupantdetection system. If there is a mal-function of the occupant detectionsystem, the PASSENGER AIR BAG“OFF” indicator will not illuminateand the passenger's front air bagwill inflate in frontal impact crasheseven if there is no occupant in thefront passenger's seat. If the SRS

air bag warning light does not illu-minate when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position, remainsilluminated after approximately 6seconds when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle isbeing driven, have an authorizedKIA dealer inspect the occupantdetection system and the SRS airbag system as soon as possible.

OTD039020

OTD039021

Driver’s front air bag

Passenger’s front air bag



3 49

✽ NOTICE• Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the sunvisor.

• Advanced air bags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help provideenhanced occupant protection infrontal crashes. Front air bags are notintended to deploy in collisions in whichsufficient protection can be provided bythe pre-tensioner seat belt alone.

WARNINGManufacturers are required by gov-ernment regulations to provide acontact point concerning modifica-

tions to the vehicle for persons withdisabilities, which modificationsmay affect the vehicle’s advancedair bag system. However, KIA doesnot endorse nor will it support anychanges to any part or structure ofthe vehicle that could affect theadvanced air bag system, includingthe occupant detection system.

Specifically, the front passengerseat, dashboard or door should not

be replaced except by an author-ized KIA dealer using original KIAparts designed for this vehicle andmodel. Any other such replacementor modification could adverselyaffect the operation of the occupantdetection system and youradvanced air bags. For the samereason, do not attach anything tothe seat, dashboard or door, eventemporarily. If the system is

adversely affected, it could causesevere personal injuries or death ina collision.

(Continued)

• Never place a child in any child orbooster seat in the front seat.

• ABC – Always Buckle Children in

the back seat. It is the safestplace for children of any age toride.

• Front and side air bags can injureoccupants improperly positionedin the front seats.

• Move your seat as far back aspractical from the front air bags,while still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

• You and your passengers should

never sit or lean unnecessarilyclose to the air bags. Improperlypositioned drivers and passen-gers can be severely injured byinflating air bags.

• Never lean against the door orcenter console – always sit in anupright position.

• Do not allow a passenger to ridein the front seat when the PAS-SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indica-

tor is illuminated, because the airbag will not deploy in the event ofa moderate or severe frontalcrash.

(Continued)

WARNINGAlways use seat belts and childrestraints – every trip, every time,

everyone! Air bags inflate with con-siderable force and in the blink ofan eye. Seat belts help keep occu-pants in proper position to obtainmaximum benefit from the air bag.Even with advanced air bags,improperly and unbelted occupantscan be severely injured when theair bag inflates. Always follow theprecautions about seat belts, airbags and occupant safety con-tained in this manual.To reduce the chance of serious orfatal injuries and receive the maxi-mum safety benefit from yourrestraint system:

(Continued)




503

(Continued)

• No objects should be placed overor near the air bag modules onthe steering wheel, instrument

panel, and the front passenger'spanel above the glove box,because any such object couldcause harm if the vehicle is in acrash severe enough to causethe air bags to deploy.

• Never place covers, blankets oraftermarket seat warmers on thepassenger seat as these mayinterfere with the occupant detec-tion system.

• Do not tamper with or disconnectSRS wiring or other componentsof the SRS system. Doing socould result in injury, due to acci-dental deployment of the air bagsor by rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If the SRS air bag warning lightremains illuminated while thevehicle is being driven, have an

authorized KIA dealer inspect theair bag system as soon as possi-ble.

• Air bags can only be used once –have an authorized KIA dealerreplace the air bag immediatelyafter deployment.

• The SRS is designed to deploythe front air bags only when animpact is sufficiently severe andwhen the impact angle is less

than 30°from the forward longitu-dinal axis of the vehicle.Additionally, the air bags will onlydeploy once. Seat belts must beworn at all times.

• Front air bags are not intended todeploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. Inaddition, front air bags will notdeploy in frontal crashes belowthe deployment threshold.

(Continued)

1JBB3520

1JBA3514

1JBA3522

Side impact

Rear impact

Rollover




Th id i t i b d i d t



523

The side impact air bags are designed todeploy only during certain side-impactcollisions, depending on the crash sever-ity, angle, speed and point of impact. Theside air bags are not designed to deploy

in all side impact situations.

(Continued)

• Do not use any accessory seatcovers.

• Use of seat covers could reduce

or prevent the effectiveness ofthe system.

• Do not install any accessories onthe side or near the side impactair bag.

• Do not place any objects over theair bag or between the air bagand yourself.

• Do not place any objects (anumbrella, bag, etc.) between thefront door and the front seat.

Such objects may become dan-gerous projectiles and causeinjury if the supplemental side airbag inflates.

• To prevent unexpected deploy-ment of the side impact air bagthat may result in personal injury,avoid impact to the side impactsensor when the ignition switchis on.

(Continued)

WARNING• The side impact air bag is sup-

plemental to the driver's and thepassenger's seat belt systems

and is not a substitute for them.Therefore your seat belts must beworn at all times while the vehicleis in motion. The air bags deployonly in certain side impact condi-tions severe enough to causesignificant injury to the vehicleoccupants.

• For best protection from the sideimpact air bag system and toavoid being injured by the

deploying side impact air bag,both front seat occupants shouldsit in an upright position with theseat belt properly fastened. Thedriver's hands should be placedon the steering wheel at 9:00 and3:00 positions. The passenger'sarms and hands should beplaced on their laps.

(Continued)


The curtain air bags are designed to



3 53

C040700AUN

Curtain air bag (if equipped)

Curtain air bags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the front andrear doors.

They are designed to help protect theheads of the front seat occupants andthe rear outboard seat occupants in cer-tain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed todeploy only during certain side impactcollisions, depending on the crash sever-ity, angle, speed and impact. The curtainair bags are not designed to deploy in all

side impact situations, collisions from thefront or rear of the vehicle or in mostrollover situations.

OMG037051

OUN026090

(Continued)

• If the seat or seat cover is dam-aged, have the vehicle checkedand repaired by an authorized

KIA dealer. Inform that your vehi-cle is equipped with side impactair bags.




543

(Continued)

• Never try to open or repair anycomponents of the side curtainair bag system. This should onlybe done by an authorized KIAdealer.

Failure to follow the above men-tioned instructions can result ininjury or death to the vehicle occu-pants in an accident.

WARNING• In order for side and curtain air

bags to provide its best protec-tion, both front seat occupants

and both outboard rear occu-pants should sit in an uprightposition with the seat belts prop-erly fastened. Importantly, chil-dren should sit in a proper childrestraint system in the rear seat.

• When children are seated in therear outboard seats, they must beseated in the proper childrestraint system. Make sure toput the child restraint system as

far away from the door side aspossible, and secure the childrestraint system in a locked posi-tion.

• Do not allow the passengers tolean their heads or bodies ontodoors, put their arms on thedoors, stretch their arms out ofthe window, or place objectsbetween the doors and passen-gers when they are seated on

seats equipped with side impactand/or curtain air bags.

(Continued)




Although the front air bags (driver’s and



3 57

Side air bags (if equipped)

Side air bags (side impact and/or curtainair bags) are designed to inflate when animpact is detected by side collision sen-sors depending on the strength, speed or

angles of impact resulting from a sideimpact collision.

g g (front passenger’s air bags) are designedto inflate only in frontal collisions, theyalso may inflate in other types of colli-sions if the front impact sensors detect a

sufficient impact. Side air bags (sideimpact and/or curtain air bags) aredesigned to inflate only in side impactcollisions, but they may inflate in othercollisions if the side impact sensorsdetect a sufficient impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted bybumps or objects on unimproved roads,the air bags may deploy. Drive carefullyon unimproved roads or on surfaces notdesigned for vehicle traffic to prevent

unintended air bag deployment.

C040802ATD

Air bag non-inflation conditions

• In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags aredesigned not to deploy in such casesbecause they may not provide benefitsbeyond the protection of the seat beltsin such collisions.

1JBA3515

1JBA3516

OUN026090




C041100ATD

SRS C WARNING (Continued)



603

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-freeand so there are no parts you can safelyservice by yourself. If the SRS air bag

warning light does not illuminate, or con-tinuously remains on, have your vehicleimmediately inspected by an authorizedKIA dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or anywork on the steering wheel must be per-formed by an authorized KIA dealer.Improper handling of the SRS systemmay result in serious personal injury.

WARNING• Modification to SRS components

or wiring, including the additionof any kind of badges to the pad

covers or modifications to thebody structure, can adverselyaffect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-ers, use only a soft, dry cloth orone which has been moistenedwith plain water. Solvents orcleaners could adversely affectthe air bag covers and properdeployment of the system.

• No objects should be placed overor near the air bag modules onthe steering wheel, instrumentpanel, and the front passenger'spanel above the glove box,because any such object couldcause harm if the vehicle is in acrash severe enough to causethe air bags to inflate.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If the air bags inflate, they mustbe replaced by an authorized KIAdealer.

• Do not tamper with or disconnectSRS wiring, or other componentsof the SRS system. Doing socould result in injury, due to acci-dental inflation of the air bags orby rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

• If components of the air bag sys-tem must be discarded, or if thevehicle must be scrapped, certainsafety precautions must beobserved. An authorized KIAdealer knows these precautionsand can give you the necessaryinformation. Failure to followthese precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk ofpersonal injury.

• If your vehicle was flooded andhas soaked carpeting or water onthe floor, you shouldn't try tostart the engine; have the vehicletowed to an authorized KIA deal-er.



623

C041200AUN-EC

Air bag warning label(if equipped)

Air bag warning labels, some required bythe Canada Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards (CMVSS), are attached toalert the driver and passengers of poten-tial risks of the air bag system.

OAM039041




✽ NOTICEWhen starting the engine do not use the

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.

CAUTION



44

When starting the engine, do not use thekey with other immobilizer keys around.Otherwise the engine may not start ormay stop soon after it starts. Keep eachkey separately in order to avoid a start-ing malfunction.

✽ NOTICEIf you need additional keys or lose yourkeys, consult an authorized KIA dealer.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

The transponder in your ignition key is an important part of the immobilizer system. It is designed

to give years of trouble-free service,however you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. Immobilizer system malfunction could occur.

CAUTIONDo not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could cause the immobilizer sys-

tem to malfunction and should only be serviced by an authorized KIAdealer.

Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, adjustments or modifications to the immobilizer system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer warranty.

CAUTIONDo not put metal accessories near the ignition switch. Metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal and may prevent the engine from being started.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user's authority to operate

the equipment.




D040104AHM

Start-up

D040300AHM-EC

Smart key precautions

CAUTIONK h k f



4 7

You can start the engine without insertingthe key. For detailed information refer to“Starting the engine with a smart key” insection 5.

✽ NOTICE• If, for some reason, you happen to lose

your smart key, you will not be able to

start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if necessary, and contact an authorizedKIA dealer.

• A maximum of 2 smart keys can beregistered to a single vehicle. If youlose a smart key, you should immedi-ately take the vehicle and key to yourauthorized KIA dealer to protect itfrom potential theft.

• The smart key will not work if any of following occurs:

- The smart key is close to a radiotransmitter such as a radio station oran airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the smart key.

- The smart key near a mobile two-way radio system or a cellularphone.

- Another vehicle’s smart key is beingoperated close to your vehicle.

When the smart key does not workcorrectly, open and close the door with

the mechanical key. If you have aproblem with the smart key, contactan authorized KIA dealer.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

Keep the smart key away from water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operatethe equipment. If the keyless entrysystem is inoperative due to

changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance, it willnot be covered by your manufactur-er’s vehicle warranty.




CAUTION• The transmitter or smart key is



4 11

• The transmitter or smart key is designed to give you years of trouble-free use, however it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use or replace the battery,contact an authorized KIAdealer.

• Using the wrong battery can cause the transmitter or smart key to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.

• To avoid damaging the transmitter or smart key, don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it to heat or sunlight.

• An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.


• Doors can also be locked andunlocked with the transmitter key (orsmart key). (if equipped)

DOOR LOCKS



124

D050100ATD-EU

Operating door locks from out-side the vehicle

• Turn the key toward the rear of thevehicle to unlock and toward the frontof the vehicle to lock.

• If you lock/unlock the door with a key,all vehicle doors will lock/unlock auto-matically.

• From the driver’s door, turn the key tothe left once to unlock the driver’s doorand once more within 4 seconds tounlock all doors.

smart key). (if equipped)

• Once the doors are unlocked, they maybe opened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the doorby hand. Make sure the doors areclosed securely.

✽ NOTICE• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not workproperly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-ple times in rapid succession witheither the vehicle key or door lock

switch, the system may stop operatingtemporarily in order to protect thecircuit and prevent damage to systemcomponents.

• To lock a door without the key, push theinside door lock button (1) or centraldoor lock switch (2, if equipped) to the

“Lock” position and close the door (3).• If you lock the door with the centraldoor lock switch (2), all vehicle doorswill lock automatically. (if equipped withcentral door lock system)

✽ NOTICEAlways remove the ignition key, engagethe parking brake, close all windowsand lock all doors when leaving yourvehicle unattended.

OHD046001

LockUnlock

OTD049005


• If the inner door handle of the frontdoor is pulled when the door lock but-ton is in the lock position, the button

Driver’s door Passenger’s door

■ 4door vehicle, 5door vehicle



4 13

Operating door locks from insidethe vehicle

D050201ATD-EE

With the door lock button • To unlock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the “Unlock” position. Thered mark (2) on the button will be visi-ble.

• To lock a door, push the door lock but-ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the dooris locked properly, the red mark (2) onthe door lock button will not show.

• To open a door, pull the door handle(3) outward.

p ,will unlock and the door will open. (ifequipped)

• Front doors cannot be locked if theignition key is in the ignition switch (orif the smart key is in the vehicle) andany front door is opened. (if equipped)

D050202ATD-EU

With central door lock switch (if equipped)

Operate by pressing the central door lockswitch.

OTD049006

LockUnlock

WARNING - Door lock mal-function

If a power door lock ever fails tofunction while you are in the vehi-cle, try one or more of the followingtechniques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock featurerepeatedly (both electronic andmanual) while simultaneouslypulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks andhandles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use thekey to unlock the door from out-side. OTD049007N

OTD049007/OHM048010

Driver’s door Passenger’s door

■ 2door vehicle


• Press the switch to the "Lock" position(1), all vehicle doors will lock.

• Press the switch to the "Unlock" posi-

D050300AHM

Impact sensing door unlock sys-tem (if equipped)

WARNING - Unlockedvehicles



144

ption (2), all vehicle doors will unlock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch (or ifthe smart key is in the vehicle) and anyfront door is opened, the doors will notlock when the “Lock” position (1) of thecentral door lock switch is pressed. (ifequipped)

tem (if equipped)

All doors will automatically unlock whenan impact causes the air bags to deploy.

D050400ATD-EU

Auto door lock/unlock feature(if equipped)

• All doors will automatically lock whenthe transaxle shift lever is shifted out ofP (Park).

• All doors will automatically unlockwhen the transaxle shift lever is shiftedinto P (Park).

Leaving your vehicle unlocked caninvite theft or possible harm to youor others from someone hiding inyour vehicle while you are gone.Always remove the ignition key,engage the parking brake, close allwindows and lock all doors whenleaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren

An enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death orsevere injury to unattended chil-dren or animals who cannot escapethe vehicle. Furthermore, childrenmight operate features of the vehi-cle that could injure them, or theycould encounter other harm, possi-bly from someone gaining entry tothe vehicle. Never leave children oranimals unattended in your vehicle.

WARNING - Doors• The doors should always be fully

closed and locked while the vehi-cle is in motion to prevent acci-dental opening of the door.

Locked doors will also discour-age potential intruders when thevehicle stops or slows.

• Be careful when opening doorsand watch for vehicles, motorcy-cles, bicycles or pedestriansapproaching the vehicle in thepath of the door. Opening a doorwhen something is approachingcan cause damage or injury.


D050400ATD-EE

✽ NOTICEAn authorized KIA dealer can activate

3. Close the rear door.

To open the rear door, pull the outsidedoor handle (3).



4 15

or deactivate some auto door lock/ unlock features as follows;• Auto door unlock by using the dri-

ver's door lock button• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting the

transaxle shift lever out of P (Park) orinto P (Park)

• Auto door unlock when the ignitionkey is removed from the ignitionswitch (for smart key, when theENGINE START/STOP button isturned to the OFF position)

If you want to activate or deactivatesome door lock/unlock feature, consult

an authorized KIA dealer.

D050500ATD-EU

Child-protector rear door lock(for 4 door, 5 door vehicle only)

The child safety lock is provided to helpprevent children from accidentally open-ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.The rear door safety locks should beused whenever children are in the vehi-cle.

1. Open the rear door.

2. Push the child safety lock (1) locatedon the rear edge of the door to thelock position. When the child safetylock is in the lock position, rear door

will not open even when the inner doorhandle is pulled.

Even though the doors may be unlocked,the rear door will not open by pulling theinner door handle (2) until the rear doorchild safety lock is unlocked.

WARNING - Rear doorlocks

If children accidentally open therear doors while the vehicle is inmotion, they could fall out and beseverely injured or killed. To pre-vent children from opening the reardoors from the inside, the rear door

safety locks should be used when-ever children are in the vehicle.

OTD049008




WARNING• No one should be allowed to



4 17

D070300ATD

Emergency trunk safety release

Your vehicle is equipped with an emer-

gency trunk release cable located insidethe trunk. The lever glows in the darkwhen the trunk lid is closed. If someoneis inadvertently locked in the trunk,pulling this handle will release the trunklatch mechanism and open the trunk.

occupy the trunk of the vehicle atany time. If the trunk is partiallyor totally latched and the personis unable to get out, severe injuryor death could occur due to lackof ventilation, exhaust fumes andrapid heat build-up, or because ofexposure to cold weather condi-tions. The trunk is also a highlydangerous location in the eventof a crash because it is not a pro-tected occupant space but mere-ly a part of the vehicle’s crushzone.

• Your vehicle should be keptlocked and keys be kept out ofthe reach of children. Parentsshould teach their children aboutthe dangers of playing in trunks.

OTD049010


✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, door lock anddoor mechanisms may not work proper-

D070200AUN

Closing the tailgate

To close the tailgate, lower and pushd h il fi l M k h

TAILGATE (5 DOOR VEHICLE)



184

D070100AFD

Opening the tailgate

• The tailgate is locked or unlocked

together if all doors are locked orunlocked with the key, transmitter orcentral door lock switch.

• The tailgate is unlocked alone for 30seconds if the tailgate unlock button onthe transmitter is pressed. Once thetailgate is opened and then closed, thetailgate is locked automatically.

• If unlocked, the tailgate can be openedby pressing the handle and pulling itup.

ly due to freezing conditions. down the tailgate firmly. Make sure thatthe tailgate is securely latched.

OTD041232

WARNINGThe tailgate swings upward. Makesure no objects or people are nearthe rear of the vehicle when open-ing the tailgate.

CAUTIONMake certain that you close the tailgate before driving your vehicle.Possible damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attaching hardware if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.

WARNING - Exhaustfumes

If you drive with the tailgate open,you will draw dangerous exhaustfumes into your vehicle which cancause serious injury or death tovehicle occupants.

If you must drive with the tailgateopen, keep the air vents and all win-dows open so that additional out-side air comes into the vehicle.

WARNING - Rear cargoarea

Occupants should never ride in therear cargo area where no restraintsare available. To avoid injury in theevent of an accident or suddenstops, occupants should always be

properly restrained.




D080000APB

(1) Driver’s door power window switch*

(2) Front passenger’s door power win-dow switch*

WINDOWS



204

dow switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window switch*

(4) Rear door (right) power windowswitch*

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window down*

(7) Power window lock button*

*: if equipped

✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, power win-dows may not work properly due tofreezing conditions.

OTDC049011N




HOOD



4 23

D090100TD

Opening the hood

1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the

hood. The hood should pop openslightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise thehood slightly, push the secondary latch(1) inside of the hood center and liftthe hood (2).

3.Pull out the support rod from the hood.

4.Hold the hood opened with the supportrod.

OTD049014 OMG035065 OTD049131

WARNING - Hot partsGrasp the support rod in the areawrapped in rubber. The plastic willhelp prevent you from being burnedby hot metal when the engine ishot.


D090200AAM

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-lowing:

WARNING - Hood• Before closing the hood, ensure

that all obstructions are removed

WARNING• Always double check to be sure

that the hood is firmly latched



244

g

• All filler caps in the engine compart-ment must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-bustible material must be removedfrom the engine compartment.

2. Return the support rod to its clip toprevent it from rattling.

3. Lower the hood until it is about 30 cm(1 ft.) above the closed position and letit drop. Make sure that it locks intoplace.

from the hood opening. Closingthe hood with an obstruction

present in the hood opening mayresult in property damage orsevere personal injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or anyother combustible material in theengine compartment. Doing somay cause a heat-induced fire.

ybefore driving away. If it is notlatched, the hood could open

while the vehicle is being driven,causing a total loss of visibility,which might result in an accident.

• The support rod must be insertedcompletely into the hole whenev-er you inspect the engine com-partment. This will prevent thehood from falling and possiblyinjuring you.

• Do not move the vehicle with thehood raised. The view will be

blocked and the hood could fallor be damaged.




(Continued)

• If a fire breaks out during refuel-ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-cle, and immediately contact the

CAUTION• Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the "Fuel requirements" suggested in section 1



4 27

, ymanager of the gas station andthen contact the local fire depart-ment. Follow any safety instruc-tions they provide.

ments suggested in section 1.

• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a genuine KIA cap or the equivalent specified for your vehicle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control system.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.

• After refueling, make sure the fuel

cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.


✽ NOTICE• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof

may not work properly due to freez-ing conditions.Aft th hi l i h d i

✽ NOTICEThe sunroof cannot slide when it is inthe tilt position nor can it be tilted whilein an open or slide position.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)



284

D110000AHM-EE

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,you can slide or tilt your sunroof with thesunroof control lever located on the over-

head console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed,or tilted when the ignition switch is in theON position.

• After the vehicle is washed or in arainstorm, be sure to wipe off any

water that is on the sunroof beforeoperating it.

OTD049015

CAUTIONDo not continue to press the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened, closed, or tilted.Damage to the motor or system components could occur.

WARNINGNever adjust the sunshade or sun-roof while driving. This could resultin loss of control and an accidentthat may cause death, seriousinjury, or property damage.


To open the sunroof automatically:

Pull the sunroof control lever backward(1) to the second detent position andthen release it. The sunroof will slideopen automatically but will not open all



4 29

D110100ATD

Sliding the sunroofTo open or close the sunroof (manualslide feature), pull or push the sunroof

control lever backward or forward to thefirst detent position.

open automatically but will not open allthe way. If you would like to completely

open the sunroof, pull the lever oncemore. However, the second time the leveris pulled the sunroof will open only whilethe lever is pulled.

To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,pull or push the sunroof control levermomentarily.

To close the sunroof automatically:

Push the sunroof control lever forward (2)to the second detent position and then

release it. The sunroof will automaticallyclose all the way.

To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,pull or push the sunroof control levermomentarily.

D110101AEN

Automatic reversal

If an object or part of the body is detect-ed while the sunroof is closing automati-

cally, it will reverse direction, and thenstop.

The auto reverse function does not workif a tiny obstacle is between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the sunroof beforeclosing it.

OBK049018OTD049016




D110500ATD

Resetting the sunroofWhenever the vehicle battery is discon-nected or discharged, or related fuse isblown, you must reset your sunroof sys-

5. Push the sunroof control lever upwarduntil the sunroof completes operatingas follows;

TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN →



4 31

, y y ytem as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ONposition.

2. According to the position of the sun-roof, do the following.

1) In case the sunroof is closed com-pletely or tilted:

Push the sunroof control leverupward until the sunroof tilts com-pletely upward.

2) In case the sunroof is open:Push the sunroof control lever for-ward until the sunroof closes com-pletely. Push the sunroof controllever upward until the sunroof tiltscompletely upward.

3. Release the sunroof control lever.

4. Push the sunroof control lever upward(for about 10 seconds) until the sun-roof has returned to the original tiltposition after it is raised a little higherthan the maximum tilt position. Then,release the lever.

SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof sys-tem has been reset.




CAUTIONDo not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do not press on the horn with a sharp-

i t d bj t



344

D130500AUN

HornTo sound the horn, press the horn sym-bol on your steering wheel. Check the

horn regularly to be sure it operatesproperly.

✽ NOTICETo sound the horn, press the area indi-cated by the horn symbol on your steer-ing wheel (see illustration). The hornwill operate only when this area ispressed.

pointed object.

OTD049019


D140100ATD

Inside rearview mirror

Adjust the rearview mirror so that thecenter view through the rear window isseen. Make this adjustment before you

D140102ATD

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) (if equipped)

The electric rearview mirror automatical-ly controls the glare from the headlightsof the vehicle behind you in nighttime or

MIRRORS

Night



4 35

start driving.

D140101AHM

Day/night rearview mirror (if equipped)

Make this adjustment before you start

driving and while the day/night lever is inthe day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you toreduce the glare from the headlights ofthe vehicles behind you during night driv-ing.

Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

of the vehicle behind you in nighttime or

low light driving conditions. The sensormounted in the mirror senses the lightlevel around the vehicle, and automati-cally controls the headlight glare fromvehicles behind you.

When the engine is running, the glare isautomatically controlled by the sensormounted in the rearview mirror.

Whenever the shift lever is shifted intoreverse (R), the mirror will automaticallygo to the brightest setting in order to

improve the drivers view behind the vehi-cle.

WARNING - Rear visibilityDo not place objects in the rearseat which would interfere withyour vision through the rear win-dow. OMG035072

CAUTIONWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. It may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

WARNING

Do not adjust the rearview mirrorwhile the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, andan accident which could causedeath, serious injury or propertydamage.

Day




CAUTION• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor contin- ues to operate while the switch is



384

D140202ATD

Folding the outside rearview mirror

To fold the outside rearview mirror, graspthe housing of the mirror and then fold it

toward the rear of the vehicle.

ues to operate while the switch is

pressed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand.Doing so may damage the related parts. OMG035071


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

■ Type A



4 39

1. Tachometer

2. Fuel gauge

3. Speedometer

4. Turn signal indicators

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Odometer/Trip computer*

7. LCD display*

* : if equipped

OTD049050C/OTD049051CD150000ATD

* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ

from the illustration.For more details refer to the "Gauges" inthe next pages.

■ Type B




404

D150100ATD-EU

Instrument panel illumination(if equipped)

When the vehicle’s parking lights or

headlights are on, rotate the illuminationcontrol knob to adjust the brightness ofthe instrument panel illumination.

The brightness of the instrument panel(Type B) illumination can be adjusted byrotating the control knob when the igni-tion switch is in ON position.

Gauges

D150201AHM

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates the forwardspeed of the vehicle.

The speedometer is calibrated in kilome-ters per hour and/or miles per hour.

D150202AFD

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the approxi-mate number of engine revolutions per

minute (rpm).Use the tachometer to select the correctshift points and to prevent lugging and/orover-revving the engine.

The tachometer pointer may move slight-ly when the ignition switch is in ACC orON position with the engine OFF. Thismovement is normal and will not affectthe accuracy of the tachometer once theengine is running.

OTD049052 OTD049053L

CAUTIONDo not operate the engine within the tachometer's RED ZONE. This may cause severe engine damage.

OTD049054




✽ NOTICEIt is forbidden to alter the odometer of all vehicles with the intent to change themileage registered on the odometer. Thealteration may void your warranty cov-erage.

Press the TRIP button for less than 1 sec-ond to select each function as follows :

Tripmeter B

Tripmeter A



424

g

D150206ATD-EU

Trip computer (Tripmeter) / ECO mode (if equipped)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-

controlled driver information system thatdisplays information related to driving,when the ignition switch is in the ONposition. All stored driving information(except distance to empty and instantfuel consumption) will reset if the batteryis disconnected.

Also, the ECO indicator ON/OFF modecan be selected by pressing the trip but-ton for less than 1 second.

OTD049057

Tripmeter B

Average fuel consumption*

Instant fuel consumption*

Average speed*

Driving time*

Distance to empty*

* : if equipped


This mode indicates the distance of indi-vidual trips selected since the last trip-meter reset.

The meter's working range is from 0.0 to999.9 km (0.0 to 999.9 miles).

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1

■ Type A ■ Type A



4 43

Tripmeter

TRIP A: Tripmeter A

TRIP B: Tripmeter B

second, when the tripmeter (TRIP A orTRIP B) is being displayed, clears thetripmeter to zero (0.0).

Distance to empty (if equipped)This mode indicates the estimated dis-tance to empty based on the current fuelin the fuel tank and the amount of fueldelivered to the engine. When theremaining distance is below 50 km (30miles), “---” will be displayed and the dis-tance to empty indicator will blink.

The meter’s working range is from 50 to999 km (30 to 990 miles).

OTD049059

OTD049060

■ Type B

OTD049061C

OTD049062L

■ Type B


■ Type A ■ Type A ■ Type A



444

Average fuel consumption (if equipped)This mode calculates the average fuelconsumption from the total fuel used andthe distance since the last average con-sumption reset.The total fuel used is cal-culated from the fuel consumption input.For an accurate calculation, drive morethan 50 m (0.03 mile).

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1second, when the average fuel consump-tion is displayed, clears the average fuel

consumption to zero (---).

Instant fuel consumption (if equipped)This mode calculates the instant fuelconsumption during the last few sec-onds.

Average speed (if equipped)This mode calculates the average speedof the vehicle since the last averagespeed reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, theaverage speed keeps going while theengine is running.

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1second, when the average speed is dis-played, clears the average speed to zero(---).

OTD049065N

OTD049066L

■ Type B

OTD049068B

OTD049068L

■ Type B

OTD049069N

OTD049070L

■ Type B


✽ NOTICE• If the vehicle is not on level ground or

the battery power has been interrupt-ed, the “Distance to empty” functionmay not operate correctly.The trip computer may not register

■ Type A

■ Type A ■ Type B



4 45

Driving time (if equipped)This mode indicates the total time trav-eled since the last driving time reset.

Even if the vehicle is not in motion, thedriving time keeps going while the engineis running.

The meter’s working range is from0:00~99:59.

Pressing the TRIP button for more than 1second, when the driving time is beingdisplayed, clears the driving time to zero(0:00).

additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons(6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehi-cle.

• The fuel consumption and distance toempty values may vary significantlybased on driving conditions, drivinghabits, and condition of the vehicle.

• The distance to empty value is an esti-mate of the available driving distance.This value may differ from the actualdriving distance available.

ECO ON/OFF mode (if equipped)

You can turn the ECOMINDERTM indica-tor (which is identified on your instrumentdashboard by the “ECO” name) on/off on

the instrument cluster in this mode.If you push the TRIP button more than 1second in the ECOMINDERTM indicatorECO ON mode, then ECO OFF is dis-played in the screen and the ECO indica-tor turns off.

If you want to display the ECOMINDERTM

indicator ECO again, press the TRIP but-ton more than 1 second in the ECO OFFmode and then ECO ON mode is dis-played in the screen.

For more detailed explanations, refer to"Warnings and indicators" in section 4.

OTD049217N

OTD049072L

■ Type B

OTD049230NOTD049231NOTD049230NOTD049231N

OTD049232NOTD049233N


D150300AAM

Warnings and indicators

All warning lights are checked by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine). Any light that does not illuminateshould be checked by an authorized KIA

D150302AUN

Air bag warning light

This warning light will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds each time youturn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

D150303AHM-U1

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light

This warning light illuminates if the igni-tion switch is turned ON and goes off in



464

dealer.After starting the engine, check to makesure that all warning lights are off. If anywarning lights are still on, this indicates asituation that needs attention. Whenreleasing the parking brake, the brakesystem warning light should go off. Thefuel warning light will stay on if the fuellevel is low.

turn the ignition switch to the ON position.

This light also comes on when theSupplement Restraint System (SRS) isnot working properly. If the air bag warn-ing light does not come on, or continu-ously remains on after operating forabout 6 seconds when you turned theignition switch to the ON position or start-ed the engine, or if it comes on whiledriving, have the SRS inspected by anauthorized KIA dealer.

approximately 3 seconds if the systemis operating normally.

If the ABS warning light remains on,comes on while driving, or does notcome on when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position, this indicatesthat the ABS may have malfunctioned.

If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby an authorized KIA dealer as soon aspossible. The normal braking system willstill be operational, but without the assis-

tance of the anti-lock brake system.




D150305ATD

Turn signal indicator

The blinking green arrows on the instru-ment panel show the direction indicatedby the turn signals If the arrow comes on

D150307AHM

Engine oil pressure warning light

This warning light indicates the engine oilpressure is low.

If the warning light illuminates while driv-

CAUTIONIf the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running, serious engine damage may result. The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is



484

by the turn signals. If the arrow comes onbut does not blink, blinks more rapidlythan normal, or does not illuminate at all,it indicates a malfunction in the turn sig-nal system.You should consult your deal-er for repairs.

This indicator also blinks when the haz-ard warning switch is turned on.

D150306AUN

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-lights are on and in the high beam posi-tion or when the turn signal lever is pulledinto the Flash-to-Pass position.

If the warning light illuminates while driving:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road andstop.

2. With the engine off, check the engineoil level. If the level is low, add oil asrequired.

If the warning light remains on afteradding oil or if oil is not available, call anauthorized KIA dealer.

CAUTIONIf the engine is not stopped immediately after the engine oil pressure warning light is illuminated, severe damage could result.

ginsufficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it should come on when the ignition switch is turned on,then go out when the engine is started. If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running, there is a serious malfunction.

If this happens, stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so, turn off the engine and check the oil level. If

the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level and start the engine again. If the light stays on with the engine running, turn the engine off immediately. In any instance where the oil light stays on when the engine is running, the engine should be checked by an authorized KIA dealer before the car is driven again.


D150308ATD

Parking brake & brake fluid warning light

Parking brake warning

This warning light illuminates for 3 sec-

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-nal braking systems.This means you stillhave braking on two wheels even if oneof the dual systems should fail. With onlyone of the dual systems working, morethan normal pedal travel and greaterpedal pressure are required to stop the

D150309APB

Front fog light indicator (if equipped)

This indicator comes on when the frontfog lights are ON.



4 49

onds after the ignition switch is turned tothe ON position and then it will go out.

Also, this light illuminates when the park-ing brake is applied with the ignitionswitch in the START or ON position. Thewarning light should go out when theparking brake is released.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the warning light remains on, it mayindicate that the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.If the warning light remains on:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safelocation and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check thebrake fluid level immediately and addfluid as required. Then check all brakecomponents for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks arefound, the warning light remains on orthe brakes do not operate properly.Have the vehicle towed to any author-ized KIA dealer for a brake systeminspection and necessary repairs.

vehicle. Also, the vehicle will not stop inas short a distance with only a portion ofthe brake system working. If the brakesfail while you are driving, shift to a lowergear for additional engine braking andstop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

To check bulb operation, check whetherthe parking brake and brake fluid warninglight illuminates when the ignition switchis in the ON position.

D150312AAM

Shift pattern indicator (if equipped)

The indicator displays which automatictransaxle shift position is selected.

WARNINGDriving the vehicle with a warninglight on is dangerous. If the brakewarning light remains on, have thebrakes checked and repaired imme-diately by an authorized KIA dealer.


D150301ATD-EU

Engine coolant temperature warning light (if equipped)

The warning light shows the temperatureof the engine coolant when the ignitionswitch is ON.

D150313AHM

Charging system warning light

This warning light indicates a malfunctionof either the generator or electricalcharging system.

D150315ATD

Trunk lid (or tailgate) open warning light

This warning light illuminates when thetrunk lid (or tailgate) is not closed secure-



504

The warning light illuminates if the tem-perature of the engine coolant is above120±3°C (248±5.5°F).

Do not continue driving with an overheat-ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, referto “Overheating” in the Index.

✽ NOTICEIf the engine coolant temperature warn-ing light illuminates, it indicates over-

heating that may damage the engine.

g g y

If the warning light illuminates while thevehicle is in motion:

1. Drive to the nearest safe location.

2. With the engine off, check the genera-tor drive belt for looseness or break-age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-lem exists somewhere in the electricalcharging system. Have an authorizedKIA dealer correct the problem as

soon as possible.

ly with the ignition switch in any position.

D150316AUN

Door ajar warning light

This warning light illuminates when adoor is not closed securely with the igni-tion switch in any position.


D150317ATD-EU

Immobilizer indicator

If any of the following occurs in a vehicleequipped with the smart key, the immobi-lizer indicator illuminates, blinks or goes

• When the battery is weak, if theENGINE START/STOP button ispressed, the indicator will blink and youare not able to start the engine.However, you are able to start theengine by inserting the smart key inthe smart key holder. If the smart key

D150318ATD

Low fuel level warning light

This warning light indicates the fuel tankis nearly empty. When it comes on, youshould add fuel as soon as possible.



4 51

off.• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if

the ENGINE START/STOP button is inthe ACC or ON position, the indicatorwill illuminate for a few minutes to indi-cate that you are able to start theengine. However, when the smart keyis not in the vehicle, if the ENGINESTART/STOP button is pressed, theindicator will blink for a few minutes toindicate that you are not be able to

start the engine.• When the ENGINE START/STOP but-

ton changes to the ON position fromthe ACC position without the smart keyin the vehicle, the indicator blinks for afew minutes to indicate that you are notbe able to start the engine.

system related parts have a problem,the indicator will blink.

Driving with the fuel level warning light onor with the fuel level below “E” can causethe engine to misfire and damage thecatalytic converter (if equipped).




D150325ATD

Cruise indicator (if equipped) CRUISE indicator

The indicator illuminates when the cruiset l t i bl d

D150327AUN

Key reminder warning chime (if equipped)

If the driver’s door is opened while theignition key is left in the ignition switch(ACC or LOCK position), the keyreminder warning chime will sound. This

i t t f l ki k

D150334ATD

Electric power steering (EPS) system warning light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates after theignition key is turned to the ON positionand then it will go off when the engine

t t

CRUISE

EPS



4 53

control system is enabled.

The cruise indicator in the instrumentcluster is illuminated when the cruisecontrol ON/OFF button on the steeringwheel is pushed.

The indicator goes off when the cruisecontrol ON/OFF button is pushed again.For more Information, refer to “Cruisecontrol system” in section 5.

Cruise SET indicator

The indicator illuminates when the cruisefunction switch (SET- or RES+) is ON.

The cruise SET indicator in the instrumentcluster illuminates when the cruise controlswitch (SET- or RES+) is pushed.

The cruise SET indicator does not illumi-nate when the cruise control switch (CAN-CEL) is pushed or the system is disen-gaged.

is to prevent you from locking your keysin the vehicle.The chime sounds until thekey is removed from the ignition switch orthe driver’s door is closed.

starts.This light also comes on when the EPShas malfunctioned. If it comes on whiledriving, have your vehicle inspected byan authorized KIA dealer.

SET


D150340ATD-EU

ECOMINDER TM indicator (if equipped)

The ECOMINDERTM indicator is dis-played to help you improve fuel efficiencywhen you are driving.

Th ECOMINDERTM i di t ill t

D150400ATD

LCD display warning (if equipped)

Door Open

This arning ill minates hen a door is

ECO ECOMINDERTM WARNINGDon't keep watching the “ECO”ECOMINDERTM indicator while driv-ing. It may distract you while driv-ing and cause an accident thatcould result in severe personalinjury



544

• The ECOMINDERTM indicator will turnthe ECO light green on the instrumentpanel when you are driving fuel effi-ciently in the ECO ON mode.

If you don't want the indicator dis-played, you can turn the ECO ONmode to OFF mode by pressing theTRIP button.

• When the instant fuel consumptionmode(if equipped) is displayed on the

LCD display or the system is not work-ing properly, the indicator turns off. Ifthe indicator turns off when the instantfuel consumption mode or ECO OFFmode is not selected, have the systemchecked by an authorized KIA dealeras soon as possible.

• The fuel efficiency depends on the dri-ver's driving habit and road condition.

• The system stops operating when thetransaxle is in the P (Park), R

(Reverse), N (Neutral) position orsports mode, or when the instant fuelconsumption mode is selected.

This warning illuminates when a door isnot closed securely.

The indicator displays which door isopened.

Low Battery

This warning indicates a malfunction ofeither the generator or electrical chargingsystem.

If the warning illuminates while the vehi-cle is in motion:

1. Drive to the nearest safe location.

2. With the engine off, check the genera-tor drive belt for looseness or break-age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-lem exists somewhere in the electrical

charging system. Have an authorizedKIA dealer correct the problem as soonas possible.

injury.


Low Fuel!

This warning indicates the fuel tank isnearly empty. When it comes on, you

should add fuel as soon as possible

Key is not detected

If the smart key is not in the vehicle or isnot detected and you press the ENGINE

START/STOP button the warning illumi

Press brake pedal to start engine

If the ENGINE START/STOP button ispressed to the ACC position twice by

pressing the button repeatedly without



4 55

should add fuel as soon as possible.Driving with the fuel level warning on orwith the fuel level below "E" can causethe engine to misfire and damage thecatalytic converter (if equipped).

Key is not in vehicle

If the smart key is not in the vehicle andif any door is opened or closed with theENGINE START/STOP button in the ACC,ON, or START position, the warning illu-minates on the LCD display. Also, thechime sounds for 5 seconds when thesmart key is not in the vehicle and thedoor is closed.

Always have the smart key with you.

START/STOP button, the warning illumi-nates on the LCD display for 10 seconds.Also, the immobilizer indicator and thekey holder light blinks for 10 seconds.

Low key battery

If the ENGINE START/STOP button ispressed to the OFF position when thesmart key in the vehicle discharges, thewarning illuminates on the LCD displayfor about 10 seconds.

Replace the battery with a new one.

pressing the button repeatedly withoutdepressing the brake pedal, the warningilluminates on the LCD display for about10 seconds to indicate that you shoulddepress the brake pedal to start theengine.

Shift to "P" position

If you try to turn off the engine without theshift lever in the P (Park) position, theENGINE START/STOP button will changeto the ACC position. If the button ispressed once more it will change to theON position. The warning illuminates onthe LCD display for about 10 seconds toindicate that you should press the ENGINESTART/ STOP button with the shift leverin the P (Park) position to turn off the

engine.




Press start button while turn steering

If the steering wheel does not unlock nor-mally when the ENGINE START/STOP

button is pressed the warning illuminates

Check steering wheel lock

If the steering wheel does not lock nor-mally when the ENGINE START/STOP

button turns to the OFF position the



4 57

button is pressed, the warning illuminatesfor 10 seconds on the LCD display. Also,the warning chime sounds once and theENGINE START/STOP button light blinksfor 10 seconds.

When you are warned, press theENGINE START/STOP button while turn-ing the steering wheel right and left.

button turns to the OFF position, thewarning illuminates for 10 seconds onthe LCD display. Also, the ENGINESTART/STOP button light blinks for 10seconds.


To turn the camera on again, press theON/OFF button again when the ignitionswitch is on and the shift lever in R(Reverse). Also, the camera will turn onautomatically whenever the ignitionswitch is turned off and on again.

REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED) HAZARD WARNING FLASHER



584

The rearview camera will activate whenthe back-up light is ON with the ignitionswitch ON and the shift lever in the R(Reverse) position.

This system is a supplemental systemthat shows behind the vehicle throughthe rearview display mirror while back-ing-up.

The rearview camera may be turned offby pressing the ON/OFF button (1) whenthe rearview camera is activated.

D180000AHM

The hazard warning flasher should beused whenever you find it necessary tostop the car in a hazardous location.When you must make such an emer-

gency stop, always pull off the road as faras possible.

The hazard warning lights are turned onby pushing in the hazard switch. Bothturn signal lights will blink. The hazardwarning lights will operate even thoughthe key is not in the ignition switch.

To turn the hazard warning lights off,push the switch again.

OTD069001

WARNING• This system is a supplementary

function only. It is the responsi-bility of the driver to alwayscheck the inside/outside rearviewmirrors and the area behind thevehicle before and while backingup because there is a dead zonethat can't be seen by the camera.

• Always keep the camera lensclean. If lens is covered with for-eign matter, the camera may notoperate normally.

OTDC049300

1


D190100APB

Battery saver function

• The purpose of this feature is to pre-vent the battery from being dis-charged. The system automaticallyturns off the parking lights when thedriver removes the ignition key and

opens the driver- side door.

LIGHTING



4 59

opens the driver side door.• With this feature, the parking lights will

turn off automatically if the dr iver parkson the side of the road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lights onwhen the ignition key is removed, per-form the following :

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ONagain using the light switch on the

steering column.

D190400ATD-EU

Lighting control

The light switch has a Headlight and aParking light position.

To operate the lights, turn the knob at theend of the control lever to one of the fol-lowing positions:

(1) OFF position

(2) Parking light position

(3) Headlight position

(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

D190401ATD

Parking light position ( )

When the light switch is in the parkinglight position (1st position), the tail, posi-tion, license and instrument panel lightswill turn ON.

OAM049041

CAUTIONIf the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except driver's door), the battery saver function does not operate. Therefore, It causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehicle.

OXM049110


CAUTION• Never place anything over sensor

(1) located on the instrument panel. This will ensure better auto-light system control.

• Don’t clean the sensor using a

window cleaner. The cleaner may l li h fil hi h ld



604

D190402ATD

Headlight position ( )

When the light switch is in the headlightposition (2nd position) the head, tail,position, license and instrument panellights will turn ON.

✽ NOTICEThe ignition switch must be in the ONposition to turn on the headlights.

Auto light position (if equipped)

When the light switch is in the AUTO lightposition, the taillights and headlights willturn ON or OFF automatically dependingon the amount of light outside the vehi-cle.

OAM049042 OSL040057

yleave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the Auto light system may not work properly.




4 61

D190500AUN

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlights,push the lever away from you. Pull it back

for low beams.The high-beam indicator will light whenthe headlight high beams are switchedon.

To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights on for aprolonged time while the engine is notrunning.

To flash the headlights, pull the levertowards you. It will return to the normal(low-beam) position when released. Theheadlight switch does not need to be onto use this flashing feature.

D190600AUN-U1

Turn signals and lane change sig-nals

The ignition switch must be on for the

turn signals to function. To turn on theturn signals, move the lever up or down(A). The green arrow indicators on theinstrument panel indicate which turn sig-nal is operating. They will self-cancelafter a turn is completed. If the indicatorcontinues to flash after a turn, manuallyreturn the lever to the OFF position.

To signal a lane change, move the turnsignal lever slightly and hold it in position(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-

tion when released.

OAM049044 OAM049043 OAM049045




WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield wiper/washer

A : Wiper speed control (front)

· MIST – Single wipe

· OFF – Off

· INT – Intermittent wipe*

· LO – Normal wiper speed

· HI – Fast wiper speed


■ 5 door vehicle



4 63

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes (front)

Rear window wiper/washer

D : Rear wiper control

· ON – Continuous wipe

· INT – Intermittent wipe*

· OFF – Off

E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)

* if equipped

OAM049100L

OXM049231L

■ 5 door vehicle

OAM049048N




CAUTION• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or other



4 65

D200300AAM

Rear window wiper and washerswitch (5 door vehicle)

The rear window wiper and washerswitch is located at the end of the wiper

and washer switch lever. Turn the switchto the desired position to operate the rearwiper and washer.

ON - Normal wiper operation

INT - Intermittent wiper operation(if equipped)

OFF - Wiper is not in operation

Push the lever away from you to sprayrear washer fluid and to run the rearwipers 1~3 cycles. The spray and wiperoperation will continue until you releasethe lever.

kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

OAM049103N OXM049125


D210000AEN

INTERIOR LIGHT

CAUTIONDo not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.



664

D210100ATD

Map lamp (if equipped)

1. Push the lens to turn the light on or off.

2. DOOR : The light comes on or goes

off when a door is opened orclosed.

3. OFF : The light stays off at all timeseven when a door is opened.

When the light is turned on withthe lens(1) pressed, the light isnot turned off even with theswitch(3) in the OFF position.

D210200ATD

Room lamp (if equipped)

1. ON : The light stays on at all times.

2. DOOR : The light comes on or off

when a door is opened orclosed.

3. OFF : The light stays off at all timeseven when a door is opened.

OTD049086OTD040085N

CAUTIONDo not leave the switch in the ON position for an extended period of time when the vehicle is not running.


D220000AUN

DEFROSTER

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the conduc- tors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners

containing abrasives to clean the window.

■ Type A



4 67

D210300ABH

Trunk room lamp (if equipped)

The trunk room lamp comes on when thetrunk lid is opened.

✽ NOTICEIf you want to defrost and defog thefront windshield, refer to “WindshieldDefrosting and Defogging” in this sec-tion.

D220100ATD

Rear window defroster

The defroster heats the window toremove frost, fog and thin ice from theinterior and exterior of the rear window,while the engine is running.

OMG035061

window.

OTD049089

OTD041089

■ Type B


To activate the rear window defroster,press the rear window defroster buttonlocated in the center facia switch panel.The indicator on the rear windowdefroster button illuminates when thedefroster is ON.

If there is heavy accumulation of snow on

the rear window, brush it off before oper-ating the rear defroster.

Th i d d f i ll

D220101AEN

Outside mirror defroster (if equipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the out-side rearview mirror defrosters, they willoperate at the same time you turn on therear window defroster.



684

The rear window defroster automaticallyturns off after approximately 20 minutesor when the ignition switch is turned off.To turn off the defroster manually, pressthe rear window defroster button again. D220200ATD

Front wiper deicer (if equipped)

The engine must be running to enablethis feature. To activate the front wiperdeicer, press the front wiper deicer but-ton. The indicator on the button illumi-nates when the deicer is ON.

The front wiper deicer automaticallyturns off after 20 minutes or when theignition switch is turned off.To turn off thedeicer, press the front wiper deicer but-ton again.

OTD049202L


MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)



4 69

OTD049090

D230000ATD

1. Air conditioning button*

2. Rear window defroster button

3. Air intake control button

4. Fan speed control knob

5. Mode selection knob

6. Temperature control knob

* : if equipped


D230100ATD

Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

To improve the effectiveness of heat-ing and cooling :

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3 Set the temperature control to the



704

3. Set the temperature control to thedesired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside(fresh) air or recirculated air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn theair conditioning system (if equipped)on.

OTD049127



724

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closedseparately using the thumbwheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivered from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

D230102APB

Temperature control

The temperature control knob allows youto control the temperature of the air flow-ing from the ventilation system. To

change the air temperature in the pas-senger compartment, turn the knob tothe right for warm air or left for cooler air.

D230103APB

Air intake control

This is used to select outside (fresh) airposition or recirculated air position.

To change the air intake control position,

push the control button.

OTD049128 OTD049095OTD049094




System operation

D230501AUN

Ventilation

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside(fresh) air position.


4. Set the fan speed control to the



744

D230104AUN

Fan speed control

The ignition switch must be in the ONposition for fan operation.

The fan speed control knob allows you to

control the fan speed of the air flowingfrom the ventilation system. To changethe fan speed, turn the knob to the rightfor higher speed or left for lower speed.

Setting the fan speed control knob to the“0” position turns off the fan.

D230105AHM

Air conditioning (if equipped)

Press the A/C button to turn the air con-ditioning system on (indicator light willilluminate). Press the button again to turn

the air conditioning system off.

pdesired speed.

D230502APB

Heating

1. Set the mode to the position.

2. Set the air intake control to the outside(fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turnthe air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the modeto the , position.

OTD049098 OTD049099


Operation Tips

• To prevent dust or unpleasant fumesfrom entering the vehicle through theventilation system, temporarily set theair intake control to the recirculated airposition. Be sure to return the controlto the fresh air position when the irrita-

tion has passed to keep fresh air in thevehicle. This will help keep the driveralert and comfortable.

D230503ATD

Air conditioning (if equipped)

All KIA Air Conditioning Systems arefilled with environmentally friendlyR-134a refrigerant which does not dam-age the ozone layer.

1. Start the engine. Push the air condi-

tioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.

3 Set the air intake control to the recir-

✽ NOTICE• While using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the temperature gaugeclosely while driving up hills or inheavy traffic when outside tempera-tures are high. Air conditioning sys-tem operation may cause engine over-

heating. Continue to use the blowerfan but turn the air conditioning sys-tem off if the temperature gauge indi-



4 75

• Air for the heating/cooling system isdrawn in through the grilles just aheadof the windshield. Care should betaken that these are not blocked byleaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-shield, set the air intake control to thefresh air position and fan speed to the

desired position, turn on the air condi-tioning system, and adjust the temper-ature control to desired temperature.

3. Set the air intake control to the recir-culated air position. However, pro-longed operation of the reticulated airposition will excessively dry the air. Inthis case, change the air position.

4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-perature control to maintain maximumcomfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, set

the temperature control to the extremeleft position, set the mode control tothe MAX A/C position, then set the fanspeed control to the highest speed.

tem off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating.

• While opening the windows in humidweather air conditioning may createwater droplets inside the vehicle.Since excessive water droplets maycause damage to electrical equipment,air conditioning should only be usedwith the windows closed.


Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in directsunlight during hot weather, open thewindows for a short time to let the hotair inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of thewindows on rainy or humid days,

decrease the humidity inside the vehi-cle by operating the air conditioningsystem.

• Operating the air conditioning systemin the recirculated air position providesmaximum cooling, however, continualoperation in this mode may cause theair inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you mayoccasionally notice a misty air flow

because of rapid cooling and humid airintake. This is a normal system opera-tion characteristic.

Outside air

Recirculatedair

Blower



764

y

• During air conditioning system opera-tion, you may occasionally notice aslight change in engine speed as theair conditioning compressor cycles.This is a normal system operationcharacteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system everymonth only for a few minutes to ensure

maximum system performance.• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, you may notice clear water drip-ping (or even puddling) on the groundunder the passenger side of the vehi-cle. This is a normal system operationcharacteristic.

D230300AHM-EC

Climate control air filter

The climate control air filter installedbehind the glove box filters the dust orother pollutants that come into the vehi-

cle from the outside through the heatingand air conditioning system. If dust orother pollutants accumulate in the filterover a period of time, the air flow from theair vents may decrease, resulting inmoisture accumulation on the inside ofthe windshield even when the outside(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-pens, have the climate control air filterreplaced by an authorized KIA dealer.

OMG075033

Climate controlair filter

Blower

Evaporatorcore

Heater core




AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

1. Front windshield defroster button

2. Climate control display

3 Rear windshield defroster button



784

OTD041101

3. Rear windshield defroster button

4. Fan speed control switch

5. AUTO (automatic control) button

6. OFF button

7. Temperature control knob

8. Air conditioning button

9. Mode selection button

10. Recirculated air position button

11. Outside air position button

D240000ATD


2. Set the temperature control knob tothe desired temperature.

If the temperature is set to the lowestsetting (Lo), the air conditioning sys-tem will operate continuously.

3. To turn the automatic operation off,select any button or switch of the fol-

lowing:• Mode selection button

• Air conditioning button



4 79

D240100ATD-EU

Automatic heating and air condi-tioning

The automatic climate control system iscontrolled by simply setting the desired

temperature.The Full Automatic Temperature Control(FATC) system automatically controls theheating and cooling system as follows;

1. Press the AUTO button. The modes,fan speeds, air intake and air-condi-tioning will be controlled automaticallyby setting the temperature.

g

• Front windshield defroster button

• Air intake control button

• Fan speed control switch

The selected function will be controlledmanually while other functions operateautomatically.

For your convenience and to improve theeffectiveness of the climate control, usethe AUTO button and set the temperatureto 23°C (73°F).

✽ NOTICENever place anything over the sensorlocated on the instrument panel toensure better control of the heating andcooling system.

OMG045045OTD049102


D240200ATD

Manual heating and air condition-ing

The heating and cooling system can becontrolled manually by pushing buttonsother than the AUTO button. In this case,the system works sequentially according

to the order of buttons selected.1. Start the engine.

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

Face-Level (B, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper bodyand face. Additionally, each outlet can becontrolled to direct the air dischargedfrom the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, C, E)



804

p

To improve the effectiveness of heat-ing and cooling :

- Heating:

- Cooling:


4. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air or recirculated air position.5. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn theair conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to con-vert to full automatic control of the sys-tem.

D240201ATD

Mode selection

The mode selection button controls thedirection of the air flow through the venti-lation system.

Every time you press the mode selectionbutton, the mode will change as follows:

Refer to the illustration in the “Manual cli-mate control system”.

Air flow is discharged towards the faceand floor.

Floor-Level (C, E, A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor, with a small amount of the air beingdirected to the windshield and side win-dow defroster.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, E, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floorand the windshield with a small amountdirected to the side window defrosters.

OTD049103




4 81

Defrost-level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closedseparately using the thumbwheel.

Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivered from these vents using the vent

control lever as shown.

D240202ATD-EC

Temperature control

The temperature will increase to themaximum (HI) by turning the knob to theextreme right.

The temperature will decrease to theminimum (Lo) by turning the knob to theextreme left.

When turning the knob, the temperaturewill increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F.

OTD049128 OTD049105OTD041104


Temperature conversion

You can switch the temperature modebetween Fahrenheit to Centigrade as fol-lows:

While pressing the OFF button, press theAUTO button for 3 seconds or more.

The display will change from Fahrenheit

to Centigrade, or from Centigrade toFahrenheit.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected the temperature mode dis

D240203ATD

Air intake control

The air intake control is used to selectoutside (fresh) air position or recirculatedair position.

To change the air intake control position,push the control button.



824

connected, the temperature mode dis-play will reset to Centigrade.

D240207AUN

Outside thermometer

The current outside temperature is dis-played in 1°C (1°F) increments. The tem-perature range is between -40°C ~ 60°C

(-40°F~140°F).• The outside temperature on the display

may not change immediately like ageneral thermometer to prevent thedriver from being inattentive.

OTD049203L


✽ NOTICEProlonged operation of the heating inrecirculated air position will cause fog-ging of the windshield and side windowsand the air within the passenger com-partment will become stale.In addition, prolonged operation of the

air conditioning with the recirculatedair position selected, will result in exces-sively dry air in the passenger compart-ment.



4 83

Recirculated air position

The indicator light on the button illumi-nates when the recirculated air positionis selected.

With the recirculated air position selected,

air from the passenger compartment willbe drawn through the heating system andheated or cooled according to the func-tion selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

The indicator light on the button illumi-nates when the outside (fresh) air posi-tion is selected.

With the outside (fresh) air position

selected, air enters the vehicle from out-side and is heated or cooled according tothe function selected.

ment.

WARNING• Continuous use of the climate con-

trol system in the recirculated airposition may allow humidity toincrease inside vehicle which may

fog the glass and obscure visibility.• Do not sleep in a vehicle with air

conditioning or heating system on.It may cause serious harm or deathdue to a drop in the oxygen leveland/or body temperature.

• Continuous use of the climate con-trol system in the reciruclated airposition can cause drowsiness orsleepiness, and loss of vehiclecontrol.Set the air intake control to

the outside (fresh) air position asmuch as possible while driving.

OTD049106 OTD049107




844

D240205ATD

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set to the desiredspeed by pressing the fan speed controlswitch.

To change the fan speed press thepart of the switch for higher speed orpress the part of the switch for lowerspeed.

To turn the fan speed control off, pressthe OFF button.

D240206AHM

Air conditioning

Press the A/C button to turn the air con-ditioning system on (indicator light willilluminate).

Press the button again to turn the airconditioning system off.

D240208ATD

OFF mode

Press the OFF button to turn off the airclimate control system.However, you canstill operate the mode and air intake but-

tons as long as the ignition switch is inthe ON position.

OTD049109 OTD049111 OTD049110


WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGINGD250000AUN • For maximum defrosting, set the tem-

perature control to the extremeright/hot position and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired whiledefrosting or defogging, set the modeto the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and icefrom the windshield, rear window, out-side rear view mirrors, and all side win-dows.

WARNING - Windshieldheating

Do not use the or positionduring cooling operation inextremely humid weather. The dif-

ference between the temperature ofthe outside air and the windshieldcould cause the outer surface ofthe windshield to fog up causing



4 85

• Clear all snow and ice from the hoodand air inlet in the cowl grill to improveheater and defroster efficiency and toreduce the probability of fogging upthe inside of the windshield.

Manual climate control system

D250101AFD

To defog inside windshield

1. Select any fan speed except “0” posi-tion.

2. Select desired temperature.3. Select the or position.

4. The outside (fresh) air will be selectedautomatically.

If the outside (fresh) air position is notselected automatically, press the corre-sponding button manually.

OTD049112N

the windshield to fog up, causingloss of visibility. In this case, setthe mode selection knob or buttonto the position and fan speedcontrol knob or button to a lowerspeed.




864

D250102AFD

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

position.3. Select the position.

4. The outside (fresh) air will be selectedautomatically.

Automatic climate control system

D250201ATD

To defog inside windshield

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The outside (fresh) air position will beselected automatically.

If the outside (fresh) air position is notselected automatically, adjust the corre-sponding button manually.

D250202ATD

To defrost outside windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-tion.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

(HI) position.3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The outside (fresh) air position will beselected automatically.

OTD049114N OTD049115NOTD049113N


D250300AHM

Defogging logic

To reduce the probability of fogging upinside of the windshield, the air intake orair conditioning are controlled automati-cally according to certain conditions suchas or position. To cancel orreturn to the defogging logic, do the fol-lowings.

D250301AUN

Manual climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.

2. Turn the mode selection knob to thedefrost position ( ).

3. Push the air intake control button at

least 5 times within 3 seconds.The indicator light in the air intake controlbutton will blink 3 times with 0.5 secondof interval. It indicates that the defogging

D250302AHM-EE

Automatic climate control system

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.

2. Select the defroster position pressingthe defroster button ( ).

3. While pressing the air conditioningbutton (A/C), press the air intake con-trol button ( ) at least 5 times with-in 3 seconds.

The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5



4 87

gg glogic is canceled or returned to the pro-grammed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, it resets to the defog logicstatus.

second of interval. It indicates that thedefogging logic is canceled or returned tothe programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, it resets to the defog logicstatus.


D270000AHM

These compartments can be used tostore small items.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartment.• Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while driving. Do not attempt to place OTD049120



884

D270100ATD

Center console storage(if equipped)

To open the center console storage, pullup the lever.

D270200AUN

Glove box

To open the glove box, pull the handleand the glove box will automaticallyopen. Close the glove box after use.WARNING - Flammable

materialsDo not store cigarette lighters,propane cylinders, or other flamma-ble/explosive materials in the vehi-cle. These items may catch fireand/or explode if the vehicle isexposed to hot temperatures forextended periods.

g p pso many items in the storage compartment that the storage compartment cover can not close securely.

OTD049121N

WARNINGTo reduce the risk of injury in anaccident or sudden stop, alwayskeep the glove box door closedwhile driving.

OTD049120N

■ 2 door


WARNING• Do not keep objects except sun-

glasses inside the sunglass hold-er. Such objects can be thrownfrom the holder in the event of asudden stop or an accident, pos-sibly injuring the passengers inthe vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass holderwhile the vehicle is moving. Therear view mirror of the vehicle



4 89

D270300ATD

Sunglass holder

To open the sunglass holder, press thecover and the holder will slowly open.Place your sunglasses with the lenses

facing out.To close the sunglass holder, push it up.

OTD049122rear view mirror of the vehiclecan be blocked by an open sun-glass holder.


D280300ATD

Cup holder

INTERIOR FEATURES

WARNING - Hot liquids• Do not place uncovered cups of

hot liquid in the cup holder whilethe vehicle is in motion. If the hot

liquid spills, you may burn your-self. Such a burn to the drivercould lead to loss of control ofthe vehicle.

Front

OTD049118



904

D280301AFD

Cups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.

D280400ATD-EU

Sunvisor

Use the sunvisor to shield direct lightthrough the front or side windows.

To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use the sunvisor for the side window,pull it downward, unsnap it from thebracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down thevisor and slide the mirror cover (3, ifequipped).

Adjust the sunvisor extension forward orbackward (4).

The ticket holder (5, if equipped) is pro-vided for holding a tollgate ticket.

• To reduce the risk of personalinjury in the event of a suddenstop or collision, do not placeuncovered or unsecured bottles,glasses, cans, etc., in the cupholder while the vehicle is inmotion.

OTD049117

Rear (if equipped)OEN046157


CAUTION - Vanity mirrorlamp

Close the vanity mirror cover securely and return the sunvisor to its original position after use. If the vanity mirror is not closed securely,the lamp will stay on and could

result in battery discharge and possible sunvisor damage.

CAUTION• Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use.Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the bat-

tery to discharge.• Only use 12V electric accessories

which are less than 10A in electric capacity.



4 91

D280500AEN

Power outlet (if equipped)

The power outlet is designed to providepower for mobile telephones or otherdevices designed to operate with vehicle

electrical systems. The devices shoulddraw less than 10 amps with the enginerunning.

OTD049129N

tric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

• Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle’s power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

WARNINGDo not put a finger or a foreign ele-ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet

and do not touch with a wet hand.You may get an electric shock.


Whenever the battery terminals or relat-ed fuses are disconnected, you mustreset the time.

When the ignition switch is in the ACC orON position, the clock buttons operate asfollows:

D280601ATD

• HOUR (1) :

Pressing the H button will advance thetime display by one hour. OTD041230L

■ Type A

■ Type B



924

D280600AEN

Digital clock

D280602ATD

• MINUTE (2) :

Pressing the M button will advance thetime display by one minute.

D280604ATD

• Display conversion:

To change the 12 hour format to the 24hour format, press the H and M buttonat the same time for more than 4 sec-onds.

For example, if the time is 10:15 p.m.,the display will change to 22:15.

Outside thermometer

The current outside temperature is dis-played in 1°F (1°C) increments. The tem-perature range is between -40°F ~ 140°F(-40°C ~ 60°C).

• The outside temperature on the display

may not change immediately preventthe driver from being distracted.

OTD041124N

WARNINGDo not adjust the clock while driv-

ing. You may lose your steeringcontrol and cause severe personalinjury or accidents.

OTD049203L

■ Type B


WARNINGThe following must be observedwhen installing ANY floor mat tothe vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats aresecurely attached to the vehicle'sfloor mat anchor(s) before drivingthe vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat thatcannot be firmly attached to thevehicle's floor mat anchors



4 93

Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped)

When using a floor mat on the front floorcarpet, make sure it attaches to the floormat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keepsthe floor mat from sliding forward.

Navigation system (if equipped)

The navigation system ascertains thepresent position of your vehicle by usinginformation from satellites and guidesyou to the place you assign as the desti-nation.

Detailed information for the navigationsystem is described in a separately sup-plied manual.

B570A01Nvehicle s floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top ofone another (e.g. all-weather rub-ber mat on top of a carpeted floormat). Only a single floor matshould be installed in each posi-tion.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle wasmanufactured with driver's sidefloor mat anchors that are designedto securely hold the floor mat inplace. To avoid any interferencewith pedal operation, KIA recom-mends that only the KIA floor matdesigned for use in your vehicle beinstalled.

OTD041231N


✽ NOTICEIf you install an aftermarket HID headlamp, your vehicle’s audio and electron-ic device may malfunction.

AUDIO SYSTEM

CAUTION Before entering a place with a low

height clearance or a car wash,remove the antenna by rotating it counter-clockwise. If not, the antenna may be damaged.

• When reinstalling your antenna, it

is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure proper reception. But it could be removed



944

D300101ATD

AntennaYour vehicle uses a roof antenna toreceive both AM and FM broadcast sig-nals. This antenna can be removed. Toremove the antenna, turn it counterclock-wise. To install the antenna, turn it clock-wise.

when parking the vehicle.OHM048154N


D300205AEN

MUTE

• Press the MUTE button to cancel thesound.

• Press the MUTE button again to acti-vate the sound.

D300202AENMODE

Press the button to select Radio or CD(compact disc).

If the SEEK button is pressed for lessthan 0.8 second, it will work as follows ineach mode.

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STATIONselect buttons.

CDP mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.



4 95

D300200AEN

Steering wheel audio control(if equipped)

The steering wheel audio control buttonis installed to promote safe driving.

D300204ATD

VOLUME ( / )

Push the lever up to increase volume.

• Push the lever down to decrease vol-

ume.

D300203AHM

SEEK/PRESET ( / )

The SEEK/PRESET button has differentfunctions base on the system mode. Forthe following functions the button shouldbe pressed for 0.8 second or more.

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK selectbutton.

CDP mode

It will function as the FF/REW button.

CDC mode

It will function as the DISC UP/DOWNbutton.

CDC mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.

Detailed information for audio controlbuttons is described in the followingpages in this section.

D281900ATD

Bluetooth hands-free(if equipped)

You can use the phone wirelessly byusing the Bluetooth.

Detailed information for the Bluetoothhands-free is described in the Audio sys-tem section.

CAUTIONDo not operate the audio remote control buttons simultaneously.

OTD049100


1. ON : The light turns on.

2. MOOD :The light shade changes auto-matically at regular interval.

3. MUSIC : The light blinks or changesshade according to thesound of the audio.

If the audio is not turned on,the light does not turn on.

4. OFF :The light turns off.

5. +/- : When the lights are on, push theillumination button to adjust thelight intensity.

OTDC049222

CAUTIONDo not use the lights for extended periods when engine is not running.

It may cause battery discharge.

WARNINGMake sure the switch locks in posi-tion to avoid damage of the switch

d i j f h d b d



964

D210300ATD

Advanced lighting speaker(if equipped)

Pull down the switch.

The advanced lighting speaker that lightsaround the front speaker is adjusted by

turning the knob as follows.

g t te s ty

If the low lighting grade isselected, the intensity of thelight may be weak or may notilluminate according to theaudio volume or selected con-ditions.

✽ NOTICEThe lighting around the front speakermay not illuminate when the sound of the audio is low.

OTDC049221

and injury of your hands or bodyparts.


When a strong radio signal has reachedyour vehicle, the precise engineering ofyour audio system ensures the best pos-sible quality reproduction. However, insome cases the signal coming to yourvehicle may not be strong and clear. Thiscan be due to factors such as the dis-tance from the radio station, closeness of

other strong radio stations or the pres-ence of buildings, bridges or other largeobstructions in the area.

JBM001

FM reception

OTD049130N



4 97

D281400AFD

Aux, USB and iPod ® *(if equipped)

If your vehicle has an aux and/or USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod port,

you can use an aux port to connect audiodevices and an USB port to plug in anUSB and also an iPod port to plug in aniPod.

✽ NOTICEWhen using a portable audio deviceconnected to the power outlet, noise mayoccur during playback. If this happens,use the power source of the portableaudio device.

* iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

D300800ATD

How car audio works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcastfrom transmitter towers located aroundyour city. They are intercepted by the

radio antenna on your car. This signal isthen received by the radio and sent toyour car speakers.

JBM001OTD049130N


JBM002

AM reception

JBM003

FM radio station

JBM004



984

AM broadcasts can be received atgreater distances than FM broadcasts.This is because AM radio waves aretransmitted at low frequencies. Theselong, low frequency radio waves can fol-low the curvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight out into the atmos-phere. In addition, they curve aroundobstructions so that they can provide bet-ter signal coverage.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at highfrequencies and do not bend to follow theearth's surface. Because of this, FMbroadcasts generally begin to fade atshort distances from the station. Also,FM signals are easily affected by build-

ings, mountains, or other obstructions.These can result in certain listening con-ditions which might lead you to believe aproblem exists with your radio. The fol-lowing conditions are normal and do notindicate radio trouble:

• Fading - As your car moves away fromthe radio station, the signal will weakenand sound will begin to fade.When thisoccurs, we suggest that you selectanother stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between the trans-mitter and your radio can disturb thesignal causing static or fluttering nois-es to occur. Reducing the treble levelmay lessen this effect until the distur-bance clears.

JBM002 JBM003 JBM004


Satellite radio reception

You may experience problems in receiv-ing SIRIUS satellite radio signals in thefollowing situations.

• If you are driving on a mountain roadwhere is blocked by mountains.

JBM005



4 99

• Station Swapping - As a FM signalweakens, another more powerful sig-nal near the same frequency maybegin to play. This is because yourradio is designed to lock onto the clear-est signal. If this occurs, select anoth-er station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signalsbeing received from several directionscan cause distortion or fluttering. Thiscan be caused by a direct and reflect-ed signal from the same station, or bysignals from two stations with closefrequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition haspassed.

• If you are driving in a tunnel or a cov-ered parking area.

• If you are driving beneath the top levelof a multi-level freeway.

• If you drive under a bridge.

• If you are driving next to a tall vechi-cle(such as a truck or a bus) that blockthe signal.

• If you are driving in a valley where thesurrounding hills or peaks block the sig-

nal from the satellite.

• If you are driving in an area with talltrees that block the signal(10m or

more), for example on an road thatgoes through a dense forset.

• The signal can become weak in someareas that are not covered by therepeater station network.

Please note that these may be otherunforeseen circumstances when thereare problems with the reception of SIR-IUS satellite radio signal.

SATELITE1

SATELITE2

JBM005




1. FM/AM Selection Button

2. Automatic Channel Selection Button

3. Power ON/OFF Button & Volume Control

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL (PA710TD, USA)

❈ There will be no ® logo if the Bluetooth feature is not supported.



4 101

Knob

4. SCAN Button

5. SETUP Button

6. Manual Channel Selection Knob &

SETUP Button7. Preset Button



2. Automatic Channel Selection Button

3. Power ON/OFF Button & Volume Control

K b

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME, AUDIO CONTROL (PA760TD, USA)




1024

Knob

4. SCAN Button

5. SETUP Button

6. Manual Channel Selection Knob &

SETUP Button7. Preset Button



Turns to FM or AM mode, and togglesFM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ FM1 ➟... when thebutton is pressed each time.

2. Automatic Channel SelectionButton

• When the [SEEK ] button is pressed, itreduces the band frequency by 200 kHzto automatically select a channel. Stopsat the previous frequency if no channel isfound.

4. SCAN Button

When the button is pressed, the frequen-cies will become increased and receivethe corresponding broadcasts. This func-tion will play the frequencies for 5 sec-onds each and find other broadcasts asthe frequency increases. Press the but-ton again when desiring to continue lis-

tening to the currently playing broadcast.

5. SETUP Button

Press this button to turn to the TEXTSCROLL SDVC and P BASS adjustment

• SDVC

This function automatically adjusts thevolume level according to the speed ofthe vehicle and can be turned ON/OFFthrough the volume controller.

• POWER BASS (P.BASS)

This function creates virtual sound

effects and allows adjustments to theBASS level.

HIGH ➟ MID ➟ LOW ➟ OFF

6 Manual Channel Selection



4 103

• When the [SEEK ] button is pressed,it increases the band frequency by 200kHz to automatically select a channel.Stops at the previous frequency if nochannel is found.

3. Power ON/OFF Button &Volume Control Knob

Turns on/off the set when the IGNITIONSWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the buttonis turned to the right, it increases the vol-ume and left, decreases the volume.

SCROLL, SDVC and P.BASS adjustmentmode. If no action is taken for 5 secondsafter pressing the button, it will return tothe play mode. (After entering SETUPmode, move between items using theleft, right and PUSH functions of the[TUNE] button.)

The setup items changes from TEXTSCROLL ↔ SDVC ↔ P.BASS ↔ SIRIUS↔PHONE...

• SCROLL

This function is used to display charac-ters longer than the LCD text display andcan be turned ON/OFF through the vol-ume controller.

6. Manual Channel SelectionKnob & SETUP Button

Rotate the knob clockwise by one notchto increase frequency by 50 kHz fromcurrent frequency.

Rotate the knob counterclockwise by one

notch to decrease frequency by 50 kHzfrom current frequency.

Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL-ANCE TUNE mode. The mode selectedis shown on the display. After selectingeach mode, rotate the Audio control knobclockwise or counterclockwise.


• BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

• MIDDLE Control

To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the MID-

DLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

• TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knobclockwise while to decrease the TRE

• BALANCE Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counter clockwise, leftspeaker sound will be emphasized (rightspeaker sound will be attenuated).

7. Preset ButtonPress [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec-ond to play the channel saved in eachbutton.

Press [1]~[6] button more than 0 8 sec



1044

clockwise, while to decrease the TRE-BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

• FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise toemphasize rear speaker sound (front

speaker sound will be attenuated).Whenthe control knob is turned counterclock-wise, front speaker sound will be empha-sized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

Press [1]~[6] button more than 0.8 sec-ond or longer to save current station tothe respective button with a beep.


1. CD Loading Slot

2. CD Eject Button

3. CD Selection Button

4. Automatic Track Selection Button

5. RANDOM Play Button

CD (PA710TD, USA)




4 105

6. REPEAT Button

7. CD Indicator

8. SCAN Play Button

9. INFO Button

10. FOLDER Moving Button

11. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button


1. CD Loading Slot

2. CD Eject Button


4. Automatic Track Selection Button


6 REPEAT B tt

CD (PA760TD, USA)




1064

6. REPEAT Button

8. SCAN Play Button

9. INFO Button



12. DISC Selection Button

13. CD LOAD Button


1. CD Loading Slot

Please face printed side upward andgently press in. When the ignition switchis on ACC or ON and power is off, poweris automatically turned on if the CD isloaded. This CDP supports only 12 cmCD. If VCD or Data CD are loaded,"Reading Error" message will appear

and the CD will be ejected.

2. CD Eject Button

Press [ ] button to eject the CD duringCD playback. This button is enabled

4. Automatic Track SelectionButton

• Press [TRACK ] button for less than0.8 second to play from the beginningof current song.

• Press [TRACK ] button for less than0.8 second and press again within 1second to play the previous song.

• Press [TRACK ] button for 0.8 orlonger to initiate reverse direction highspeed sound search of current song.

• Press [TRACK ] button for less than0 8 second to play the next song

7. CD Indicator (PA710)

When car ignition switch is ACC or ONand if the CD is loaded, this indicator islighted. If the CD is ejected the light isturned off.

8. SCAN Play Button

Scans each song in the CD for 10 sec-onds each. To cancel the mode, pressthe button once again.

9. INFO Button

Di l h i f i f h CD



4 107

CD playback. This button is enabledwhen ignition switch is off.


If there is a CD in the CD DECK it turnsto CD mode then it toggles.

If there is no CD, then it displays themessage "No Media" and returns to theprevious mode.

0.8 second to play the next song.

• Press [TRACK ] button for 0.8 orlonger to initiate high speed soundsearch of current song.


Turns on/off the randomization of theplay list of files in the currently playedDISC.To cancel the mode, press the but-ton once again.

6. REPEAT Button

Repeats current song when the button ispressed for less than 0.8 second.

Repeats the entire DISC when the buttonis pressed for 0.8 second or longer.

Displays the information of the current CDTRACK in the order of DISC TITLE ➟

DISC ARTIST ➟ TRACK TITLE ➟ TRACKARTIST ➟ TOTAL TRACK ➟ PLAYSCREEN ➟ DISC TITLE ➟... (not dis-played if the information is not available

on the DISC.)


• Press [FOLDER ] button to move tochild folder of the current folder anddisplay the first song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move tothe folder displayed. It will play the firstsong in the folder.


• Press [FOLDER ] button to move to

parent folder of the current folder and

display the first song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to

the folder displayed.

11. SEARCH Knob & ENTER

ButtonTurn this button clockwise to displaysongs after current song.

Also, turn this button counterclockwise todisplay songs before current song.

• MIDDLE Control

To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the MID-DLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

• TREBLE Control

To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the TRE-

BLE, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

• FADER Control

Turn the control knob clockwise to empha-size rear speaker sound (front speaker

12. DISC Selection Button (PA760)

• Press [DISC ] button to change discto the previous disc.

• Press [DISC ] button to change discto the next disc.

13. CD LOAD Button (PA760)

Press [LOAD] button to load CDs intoavailable CDC slots (from 1~6).

Press [LOAD] button for 2 seconds orlonger to load into all available decks.Thelast CD will play. Idle status for 10 sec-



1084

To listen to the displayed song, press thebutton to skip to the song and play.

Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL-ANCE TUNE mode. The mode selected

is shown on the display. After selectingeach mode, rotate the Audio control knobclockwise or counterclockwise.

• BASS Control

To increase the BASS, rotate the knobclockwise, while to decrease the BASS,rotate the knob counterclockwise.

p ( psound will be attenuated). When the con-trol knob is turned counterclockwise, frontspeaker sound will be emphasized (rearspeaker sound will be attenuated).

• BALANCE ControlRotate the knob clockwise to emphasizeright speaker sound (left speaker soundwill be attenuated). When the controlknob is turned counter clockwise, leftspeaker sound will be emphasized (rightspeaker sound will be attenuated).

onds will terminate the loading process.


1. AUX/USB Selection Button

2. TRACK Moving Button

3. RANDOM Playback Button

4. REPEAT Selection Button

AUX/USB (PA710TD, USA)




4 109

5. SCAN Selection Button

6. INFO Button








AUX/USB (PA760TD, USA)




1104


6. INFO Button





If the auxiliary device is connected, itturns to AUX or USB mode to play thesound from the auxiliary player. If there isno auxiliary device, then it displays themessage "No Media" for 3 seconds andreturns to the previous mode.

2. TRACK Moving Button• Press the [TRACK ] button for less

than 0.8 second to play from the begin-ning of the song currently played.

Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-

3. RANDOM Playback ButtonPress the button for less than 0.8 secondto start or stop the random playback ofthe songs in the current folder.

Press the button for more than 0.8 sec-ond to randomly play the entire songs inthe USB device.

Press the button again to cancel the mode.

4. REPEAT Button

Press the button for less than 0.8 secondto repeat the song currently played.

Press the button for more than 0.8 sec-


• Press [FOLDER ] button to move tochild folder of the current folder anddisplay the first song in the folder.

Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move tothe folder displayed. It will play the firstsong in the folder.

• Press [FOLDER ] button to move to

parent folder display the first song in

the folder.

Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move to

the folder displayed.



4 111

ond and press it again within 1 secondto move to and play the previous track.

Press the button for 0.8 second orlonger to play the song in reversedirection in fast speed.

• Press the [TRACK ] button for lessthan 0.8 second to move to the nexttrack. Press the button for 0.8 secondor longer to play the song in forwarddirection in fast speed.

ond to repeat the entire songs in the USBdevice.


Scans each song in the USB device for

10 seconds each.Press the button once again to cancelscanning.

6. INFO Button

Displays the information of the file current-ly played in the order of FILE NAME ➟

TITLE ➟ ARTIST➟ ALBUM➟ FOLDER ➟TOTAL FILE ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY ➟

FILE NAME ➟… (Displays no information

if the file has no song information.)

8. SEARCH Knob & ENTERButton

Turn this button clockwise to display thesongs ahead of the currently played song.

Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-play the songs before the currentlyplayed song.

• Press the button to skip to and play theselected song.

• Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL-ANCE TUNE mode.The mode selectedis shown on the display. After selectingeach mode, rotate the Audio controlknob clockwise or counterclockwise.


CAUTION IN USINGUSB DEVICE

• To use an external USB device,make sure the device is not connected when starting up the vehicle and connect the device after starting up.

• If you start the vehicle when the USB device is connected, it may damage the USB device. (USB is not ESA)

• If the vehicle is started up or turned off while the external USB

(Continued)

• Depending on the condition of the external USB device, the connected external USB device can be unrecognizable.

• When the formatted byte/sector setting of External USB devices is not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE,

then the device will not be recognized.

• Use only a USB device formatted to FAT 12/16/32.

• USB devices without USB I/F th ti ti t b g

(Continued)

• If you disconnect the external USB device during playback in USB mode, the external USB device can be damaged or malfunction.Therefore, connect the external USB device when the engine is turned off or in another mode.

• Depending on the type and capacity of the external USB device or the type of the files stored in the device, there is a difference in the time taken for recognition of the device but this is not an indicator



1124

turned off while the external USB device is connected, the external USB device may not work.

• It may not play inauthentic MP3 or WMA files.

1) It can only play MP3 files with

the compression rate between 8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA music files with the compression rate between 8Kbps~320Kbps.

• Take cautions for static electricity when connecting or disconnect- ing the external USB device.

• An encoded MP3 player is not recognizable.

(Continued)

authentication may not be recognizable.

• Make sure the USB connection terminal does not come in contact with a human body or any object.

• If you repeat connecting or dis- connecting USB device in a short period of time, it may break the device.

• You might hear a strange noise when connecting or disconnect- ing a USB device.

(Continued)

device, but this is not an indicator of trouble and you only have to wait.

• Do not use the USB device for other purposes than playing music files.

• Use of USB accessories such as recharger or heater using USB I/F may lower performance or cause trouble.

• If you use devices such as a USB hub you purchased separately,the vehicle’s audio system may not recognize the USB device.Connect the USB device directly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.

(Continued)


(Continued)

• If USB device is divided by logical drives, only the music files on the highest-priority drive are recognized by the car audio.

• Devices, such as MP3 players,cellular phones, or digital cam- eras not recognized by standard

USB I/F may not be recognized.• USB devices other than standard-

ized goods (METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be unrecognizable.

• USB flash memory reader (such as CF SD microSD etc ) or exter

(Continued)

• Please avoid using USB memory products which can be used as key chains or cellular phone accessories as they could cause damage to the USB jack. Please make certain only to use plug type connector products as shown

below.



4 113

as CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or external-HDD type devices may be unrecognized.

• Music files protected by DRM (DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable.

• The data in the USB memory may be lost while using this AUDIO. It is recommeded to back up important data on a personal storage device.

(Continued)


1. iPod Selection Button




RUNNING iPod ® (PA710TD, USA)




1144

5. INFO Button


7. CATEGORY Selection Button

iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.






RUNNING iPod ® (PA760TD, USA)




4 115

5. INFO Button



iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.



If iPod is connected, it switches to theiPod mode from the previous mode toplay the song files stored in the iPod.

If there is no iPod connected, then it dis-plays the message "No Media" for 3 sec-onds and returns to the previous mode.

2. TRACK Moving Button• Press the [TRACK ] button for less

than 0.8 second to play from the begin-ning of the song currently played.

Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-d d it i ithi 1 d

3. REPEAT Button

Repeats the song currently played.


Press the button for less than 0.8 secondto start or stop the random playback ofthe songs within the current category.

Press the button for longer than 0.8 sec-ond to randomly play all songs in theentire album of the iPod.

Press the button once again to cancelthe mode.

5 INFO B tt

6. SEARCH Knob & ENTERButton

When you turn the button clockwise, itwill display the songs (category) aheadof the song currently played (category inthe same level).

Also, when you turn the button counter-clockwise, it will display the songs (cate-

gory) before the song currently played(category in the same level).

To listen to the song displayed in thesong category, press the button to skip toand play the selected song.

Pressing the button changes the BASS,



1164

ond and press it again within 1 secondto move to and play the previous track.

Press the button for 0.8 second orlonger to play the song in reversedirection in fast speed.

• Press the [TRACK ] button for lessthan 0.8 second to move to the nexttrack.

Press the button for 0.8 second orlonger to play the song in forward direc-tion in fast speed.

5. INFO Button

Displays the information of the file cur-rently played in the order of TITLE ➟

ARTIST ➟ ALBUM➟ NORMAL DISPLAY➟ TITLE ➟... (Displays no information if

the file has no song information.)

g gMIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL-ANCE TUNE mode. The mode selectedis shown on the display. After selectingeach mode, rotate the Audio control knobclockwise or counterclockwise.


Moves to the upper category from cur-rently played category of the iPod.

To move to (play) the category (song) dis-played, press TUNE/ENTER knob.

You will be able to search through thelower category of the selected category.

The order of iPod’s category is SONG,ALBUMS, ARTISTS, GENRES, and iPod.


✽ NOTICE FOR USING THEiPod ® DEVICE

• Some iPod models might not sup-port the communication protocoland the files will not be played.Supported iPod models:- iPod Mini- iPod 4th(Photo) ~ 6th(Classic)

generation- iPod Nano 1st~4th generation- iPod Touch 1st~2nd generation

• The order of search or playback of songs in the iPod can be differentfrom the order searched in the

CAUTION IN USINGiPod ® DEVICE

• You need the power cable exclu- sive for an iPod in order to operate an iPod with the buttons on the audio system. The PC cable provided by Apple may cause a

malfunction and do not use it for vehicle use.

• When connecting the device with an iPod cable, push in the jack fully not to interfere with communication.

When adjusting the sound effects

(Continued)

• When the iPod cable is connected,the system can be switched to the AUX mode even without the iPod device and can cause noise.Disconnect the iPod cable when you are not using the iPod device.

• When the iPod is not used for the

audio system, the iPod cable has to be separate from iPod devices.Original display of iPod may not be displayed.



4 117

audio system.• If the iPod disabled due to its own

malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset:Refer to iPod manual)

• An iPod may not operate normally

on low battery.• Some iPod devices, such as the

iPhone, can be connected through theBluetooth® interface. The devicemust have audio Bluetooth® capabili-ty (such as for stereo headphoneBluetooth®). The device can play, butit will not be controlled by the audiosystem.

• When adjusting the sound effects of an iPod and the audio system,the sound effects of both devices will overlap and might reduce or distort the quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer function of an iPod when adjusting the audio system’s volume,and turn off the equalizer of the audio system when using the equalizer of an iPod.

(Continued)


1. SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button2. Channel Selection Button

3. SCAN Button

4. INFO Button

5 CAT/FOLDER Button

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO (PA710TD, USA)




1184

5. CAT/FOLDER Button

6. TUNE Knob and ENTER Button

7. Preset Selection Button


1. SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button2. Channel Selection Button

3. SCAN Button

4. INFO Button

5 CAT/FOLDER Button

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO (PA760TD, USA)




4 119





How to Use SIRIUS SatelliteRadioYour Kia vehicle is equipped with 3months complimentary period of SIRIUSSatellite Radio so you have access toover 130 channels of music, information,and entertainment programming.

ActivationIn order to extend or reactivate your sub-scription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, youwill need to contact SIRIUS CustomerCare at 888-539-7474. Have your 12 digitSID (Sirius Identification Number)/ESN(El i S i l N b ) d T

2. Channel Selection Button

• Press [TRACK ] or [SEEK ] but-ton for less than 0.8 second to selectprevious or next channel.

• Press [TRACK ] or [SEEK ] but-ton for 0.8 or longer to continuouslymove to previous or next channel.

• If "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed at the

top of the screen, channel up/down isdone through the channels within cur-rent category.

3. SCAN Button

• When the button is pressed, it automat-

4. INFO Selection Button

Displays the information of the channelcurrently played by in the order of Artist/ Song title ➟ Category/Channel name ➟

Composer(if available) ➟ Artist/Song title➟ Category/Channel name ➟... (ART/ TITLE Selection)

Displays the information of the channel

currently played by in the order ofCategory/Channel name ➟ Artist/Songtitle ➟ Composer(if available) ➟ Category /Channel name ➟ Artist/Song title ➟...(CAT/CH Selection) (If there is no infor-mation of COMPOSER NAME, it returnsto main display.)



1204

(Electronic Serial Number) ready. Toretrieve the SID/ESN, turn on the radio,press the [SAT] button and tune to chan-nel zero. Please note that the vehicle willneed to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and

have an unobstructed view of the sky inorder for the radio to receive the activa-tion signal.

1. SATELLITE RADIO SelectionButton (SIRIUS Satellite Radio)

Press the [SAT] button to switch to SIR-IUS Satellite Radio. It cycles through thedifferent bands as noted below.

SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3 ➟ SAT1 ➟...

ically scans the radio stations upwards.

• The SCAN feature steps through eachchannel, starting from the initial chan-nel for ten seconds.

• Press the [SCAN] button again to stopthe scan feature and to listen to the cur-rently selected channel.

• If "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed at thetop of the screen, channel changing isdone through the channels in currentcategory.

to main display.)


• Press [CAT ] or [FOLDER ] buttonto enter the Category List Mode, it dis-

plays category items and highlights thecategory that currently tuned channelbelongs to.

• On Category List Mode, press thesebuttons to navigate category list.

• Press [ENTER] button to select the low-est channel in highlighted category.

• If channel is selected by selecting cate-gory "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed atthe top of the screen.



While listening to SIRIUS broadcast,rotate this knob to the right or left tosearch other channels while listening tocurrent channels and push this knob toselect what you want to listen to.

(Turn to the right to search higher chan-nels and left lower channels)


• Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec-ond to play the channel saved in eachbutton.

• Hold down the [PRESET] button for 0.8

✽ Troubleshooting1. Antenna Error

If this message is displayed, the anten-na or antenna cable is broken orunplugged. Please consult with yourKia dealership.

2. Acquiring SignalIf this message is displayed, it meansthat the antenna is covered and thatthe SIRIUS Satellite Radio signal isnot available. Ensure the antenna isuncovered and has a clear view of thesky.



4 121

second or longer to save current chan-nel. An audible beep will play to confirmthe preset is stored.


CAUTION IN USINGBLUETOOTH ® CELLULARPHONE

• Do not use a cellular phone or perform Bluetooth ® settings (e.g.pairing a phone) while driving.

• Some Bluetooth ® -enabled phones may not be recognized by the system or fully compatible with the system.

• Before using Bluetooth ® related features of the audio system,refer your phone’s User’s Manual for phone-side Bluetooth ® opera-

(continued)

• Do not place the phone near or inside metallic objects, otherwise

communications with Bluetooth ®

system or cellular service stations can be disturbed.

• While a phone is connected through Bluetooth ® your phone

may discharge quicker than usual for additional Bluetooth ® -related operations.

• Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference noise or malfunction to audio system In this case store the



1224

tions.

• The phone must be paired to the audio system to use Bluetooth ®

related features.

• You will not be able to use the hands-free feature when your phone (in the car) is outside of the cellular service area (e.g. in a tunnel, in a underground, in a mountainous area, etc.).

• If the cellular phone signal is poor or the vehicles interior noise is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person’s voice during a call.

(Continued)

system. In this case, store the device in a different location may resolve the situation.

BLUETOOTH ® PHONE OPERATION(IF EQUIPPED)

■ General Features• This audio system supports Bluetooth ®

hands-free and stereo-headset fea-tures.

- HANDS-FREE feature: Making orreceiving calls wirelessly throughvoice recognition.

- STEREO-HEADSET feature: Playing

music from cellular phones (that sup-ports A2DP feature) wirelessly.

• Voice recognition engine of theBluetooth ® system supports 3 types oflanguages:

English

Canadian French

■ Bluetooth ® Language SettingThe system language can be changed bythe following steps:

1. Power on the audio system with thevolume set to an audible level.

2. Press and hold button on thesteering wheel until the audio displays“Please Wait”.

- The Bluetooth ® system will reply incurrently selected language that it ischanging to the next language.

- System language cycles between English,Canadian French and US Spanish.

- Press and hold the button on thesteering wheel for over 10 seconds


12

4

53



1. button : Raises or lowersspeaker volume.

2. :Mute the microphone during a call.

3. button : Activates voice recognition.4. button : Places and transfers calls.5. button : Ends calls or cancels func-

tions.

■What is Bluetooth ® ?Bluetooth ® is a wireless technology thatallows multiple devices to be connectedin a short range, low-powered deviceslike hands-free, stereo headset, wireless

remocon, etc.For more information, visit theBluetooth ® website at www.Bluetooth.com

Canadian French

US Spanish

✽ NOTICE

• The phone must be paired to the sys-tem before using Bluetooth® features.• Only one selected (linked) cellularphone

can be used with the system at a time.• Some phones are not fully compatible

with this system.• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos

are registered trademarks owned byBluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license.A Bluetooth enabled cell phone isrequired to use Bluetooth® wirelesstechnology.

steering wheel for over 10 seconds.

3. When completed, the audio displayreturns to normal.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the next lan-guage selection.

NOTE:

The phone needs to be paired againafter changing system language.

- Avoid resting your thumb or fingeron the button as the languagecould unintentionally change.

MUTE

VOLUME

4 123




NOTE:

• In addition to streaming MP3 files,all music and sound files your cellu-lar phone supports can be playedby the audio system.

• Bluetooth ® compatible cellularphones must include A2DP andAVRCP capabilities.

• Some A2DP and AVRCP compatibleBluetooth ® cellular phones may notplay music through the audio sys-tem initially. These cellular phonesmay need to have the Bluetooth ®

streaming enabled, for example;

i.e : Menu➟Filemanager➟Music➟

■ Phone SetupAll Bluetooth ® related operations can beperformed in PHONE menu.

1) Push the button to enterSETUP mode.

2) Select “PHONE” item by rotating theknob, then push the knob.

3) S l t d i d it b t ti th

• Pairing a phone

Before using Bluetooth ® features, thephone must be paired (registered) withthe audio system.Up to 5 phones can bepaired with the system.

NOTE:• The pairing procedure of the phone

varies according to each phonemodel. Before attempting to pairphone, please see your phone’sUser’s Guide for instructions.

• Once pairing with the phone is com-pleted, there is no need to pair withthat phone again unless the phoneis deleted manually from the audio

TUNE

SETUP



4 125

Option➟Play via Bluetooth

• Please refer to User’s Guide for yourcellular phone for more information.To cancel Bluetooth ® cellular phone

music streaming, stop music play-back on the cellular phone orchange the audio mode to AM/FM,SIRIUS, CD, iPod, ect.

3) Select desired item by rotating theknob, then push the knob.

is deleted manually from the audiosystem (refer “Deleting a Phone”section) or the vehicle’s informationis removed from the phone.

➀ Press button to enter SETUPmode.

➁ Select “PHONE”, then “PAIR” inPHONE menu.

➂ The audio displays “Device : [Name]passkey: 0000”

➃ Search and select the device name inyour mobile phone to starting the pair-ing process.

SETUP

TUNE


NOTE:

• If the phone is paired with two ormore vehicles of the same model,some phones may not handleBluetooth ® devices of that namecorrectly. In this case, you may needto change the name displayed onyour phone.For example, if the vehicles' name isKMC CAR, you may need to changethe name displayed on you phonefrom KMC_CAR to JOHNS_CAR orKMC CAR_1 to avoid ambiguity.

Refer to your phone User’s Guide, orcontact your cellular carrier or phonemanufacturer for instructions

• Connecting a phone

When the Bluetooth ® system is enabled,the phone previously used is automati-cally selected and re-connected. If youwant to select different phone previouslypaired, the phone can be selectedthrough “Select Phone” menu.

Only a selected phone can be used withthe hands-free system at a time.


➁ Select “PHONE”, then “SELECT” inPHONE menu.

➂ Select desired phone name from the listshown.

➃ The Bluetooth ® icon appears on theupper side of audio display when aphone is connected.

SETUP



1264

manufacturer for instructions.


• Changing PriorityIf several phones are paired with theaudio system, the system attempts toconnect following order when theBluetooth ® system is enabled:

1) “Priority” checked phone.

2) Previously connected phone

3) Gives up auto connection.

➀Press button to enter SETUPmode.

➁ Select “PHONE”, then “PRIORITY” inPHONE menu.

➂ Select desired phone name from thelist shown.

• Deleting a Phone

The paired phone can be deleted.

- When the phone is deleted, all the infor-mation associated with that phone isalso deleted (including phonebook).

- If you want to use the deleted phone withthe audio system again, pairing proce-dure must be completed once more.


➁ Select “PHONE”, then “DELETE” inPHONE menu.

➂ Select desired phone name from the listshown.

• ADVANCED Menu

After pressing the button, selectthe “PHONE” menu. while in PHONEmenu, select the “ADVANCED” menu tomake Bluetooth ® Phone settings.(TheADVANCED menu may differ according toaudio specifications.)

SETUP

SETUPSETUP



4 127


Incoming Volume (Bluetooth ® call vol-ume adjustments)

While in ADVANCED menu, select“IN VOL.” Use the knob key to set thedesired volume and press thebutton.

Contacts Sync (Automatic Phonebookdownload setting)

While in Advanced menu, select"Contacts" To automatically save thecontacts and call history in your mobilephone each time you connect a mobiledevice, select ON. If you do not wish forautomatic download, select OFF.

It's not available to make a phone call by

■ Voice Recognition Activation

• The voice recognition engine containedin the Bluetooth ® System can be acti-vated in the following conditions:- Button Activation

The voice recognition system will beactive when the button is pressedand after the sound of a Beep.

- Active ListeningThe voice recognition system will beactive for a period of time when theVoice Recognition system has askedfor a customer response.

• The system can recognize single digitsf t i hil b t

■ Menu tree

The menu tree identifies available voicerecognition Bluetooth ® functions.

ENTERCall [Name] Ex) Call John(at Home)

Ex) Dial 911Dial [Number]

Redial

Call Back

Call By name

By number



1284

It s not available to make a phone call bybluetooth audio system while the phone-book is being downloaded.

Bluetooth ® system offWhile in Advanced menu, select"BT Off" to turn off the Bluetooth ®

System.

from zero to nine while number greaterthan ten will not be recognized.

• The system shall cancel voice recogni-

tion mode in following cases : Whenpressing the button and saying“cancel” following the beep. When notmaking a call and pressing thebutton. When voice recognition hasfailed 3 consecutive times.

• At any time if you say “help”, the systemwill announce what commands areavailable.

Call Back

Add entryPhonebook

Change name

Delete name

By phone

By voice


■ Making a Phone Call• Direct Calling

➀ Press button.

➁ Say the following command.

- Call <John> :Connects the call to John.

- Call <John> on <Mobile> : Connectsthe call to John’s mobile phone number.

- Call <John> at <Home> : Connects

the call to john’s home number.- Call <John> in <Office> : Connects

the call to John’s office number.

Note:

Calls can be immediately connectedto contacts who name or voice tag are

• Calling by Name

A phone call can be made by speakingnames registered in the audio system.

➀ Press button.

➁ Say “Call”.

➂ Say “By name” when prompted.

➃ Say desired name (in Phonebook or

voice tag).➄ Say desired location (phone number

type). Only stored locations can beselected.

➅ Say “Yes” to confirm and make a call.

✽Tip■ Voice Operation

To get the best performance out of theVoice Recognition System, observe thefollowings:- Keep the interior of the vehicle as

quiet as possible. Close the windowto eliminate surrounding noise

(traffic noise, vibration sounds,etc), which may disturb recogniz-ing the voice command correctly.

- Speak a command after a beepsound within 5 seconds. Otherwisethe command will not be receivedproperly.Speak in a natural voice without



4 129

to co tacts o a e o o ce tag a esaved in the phonebook(or contacts).

- Speak in a natural voice withoutpausing between words.

- While receiving voice commands,press the button on the steer-

ing wheel remote controller to ter-minate guidance. Voice commandwill convert back to waiting modeto allow the user to say a new voicecommand.



■ Key matrix

No.

Class

Paired H/PEmpty

Disconnected

1

SHORT

LONG

SHORT

Normal mode BT SETUP menuIncoming Call Outgoing Call Active Call 2nd Call

Not Paired Not Connect ing - - Accept Call

Connected

-

2nd call

1st Call:waiting

2nd Call:active

2nd Call

2nd Call:waiting

1st Call:active

KEY

- - - - - - Transfer call:secret cal l

E d C llVR VR VR VR

R j C ll E d C ll E d C ll




SHORT

SHORT

LONG[10sec]

LONG

[10sec]

End CallVR

MODE Cancel

VR

MODE Cancel

VR

MODE Cancel

VR

MODE CancelReject Call End Call End Call

-

Active

Change

language

-

Active

Speaker

Adaptation

(Only English)

Change

language

Active

Change

language

Active

-

Speaker

Adaptation

(Only English)

Change

language

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

- -

2

3

4 132

5

Before driving / 5-3

Key positions / 5-4

ENGINE START/STOP button / 5-6

Starting the engine / 5-9

Manual transaxle / 5-12

Automatic transaxle / 5-15

Brake system / 5-23

Cruise control system / 5-33

Economical operation / 5-37Special driving conditions / 5-39

Winter driving / 5-43

Trailer towing / 5-45




Trailer towing / 5-45

Vehicle load limit / 5-46

Vehicle weight / 5-51


E010000ATD

WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-dows immediately.

Do not inhale exhaust fumes.

Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-tion.

• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you heara change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have theexhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized KIA dealer.

• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage even with the garage door open is a hazardous practice Never run the engine in your



25

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in yourgarage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out.

• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open areawith the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the trunk open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.

2. Open side vents.

3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield arekept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.


E020100AUN

Before entering vehicle

Be sure that all windows, outside mir-ror(s), and outside lights are clean.

• Check the condition of the tires.

• Check under the vehicle for any sign ofleaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles behind

you if you intend to back up.

E020200AUN

Necessary inspections

Fluid levels, such as engine oil, enginecoolant, brake fluid, and washer fluidshould be checked on a regular basis,with the exact interval depending on the

E020300AHM

Before starting

• Close and lock all doors.

• Position the seat so that all controls areeasily reached.

• Adjust the inside and outside rearviewmirrors.

• Be sure that all lights work.

• Check all gauges.• Check the operation of warning lightswhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON position.

• Release the parking brake and makesure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil-iar with your vehicle and its equipment

BEFORE DRIVING

WARNINGDriving while distracted can resultin a loss of vehicle control, thatmay lead to an accident, severepersonal injury, and death. The dri-ver's primary responsibility is inthe safe and legal operation of avehicle, and use of any handheld

devices, other equipment, or vehi-cle systems which take the driver'seyes, attention and focus awayfrom the safe operation of a vehicleor which are not permissible by lawshould never be used during oper-ation of the vehicle.



5 3

with the exact interval depending on thefluid. Further details are provided inSection 7, “Maintenance”.

iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

WARNING

All passengers must be properlybelted whenever the vehicle is mov-ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section3 for more information on theirproper use.

WARNINGAlways check the surrounding areasnear your vehicle for people, espe-cially children, before putting a vehi-

cle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).


E030100AHM

Illuminated ignition switch(if equipped)

Wh f t d i d th

Ignition switch position

E030201AUN

LOCK

OTD059001 OTD059016

WARNING - Driving underthe influence of alcohol ordrugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous.Drunk driving is the number onecontributor to the highway deathtoll each year. Even a small amountof alcohol will affect your reflexes,

perceptions and judgement.Driving while under the influence ofdrugs is as dangerous or more dan-gerous than driving drunk.

You are much more likely to have aserious accident if you drink ortake drugs and drive.

If you are drinking or taking drugs

KEY POSITIONS



45

Whenever a front door is opened, theignition switch will illuminate for your con-venience, provided the ignition switch isnot in the ON position.The light will go offimmediately when the ignition switch isturned on. It will also go off after about 30seconds when the door is closed.

The steering wheel locks to protectagainst theft. The ignition key can beremoved only in the LOCK position.

When turning the ignition switch to theLOCK position, push the key inward atthe ACC position and turn the key towardthe LOCK position.

If you are drinking or taking drugs,don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-er who has been drinking or takingdrugs. Choose a designated driveror call a cab.

WARNINGWhen you intend to park or stop thevehicle with the engine on, be care-ful not to depress the acceleratorpedal for a long period of time. Itmay overheat the engine or exhaustsystem and cause fire.


E030202AUN

ACC (Accessory)

The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-trical accessories are operative.

✽ NOTICEIf difficulty is experienced turning theignition switch to the ACC position, turnthe key while turning the steering wheelright and left to release the tension.

E030203AUN

ON

The warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. This is thenormal running position after the engineis started

E030205APB

WARNING - Ignition switch

• Never turn the ignition switch toLOCK or ACC while the vehicle ismoving. This would result in lossof directional control and brakingfunction, which could cause anaccident.

• The anti-theft steering columnlock is not a substitute for theparking brake. Before leaving thedriver’s seat, always make surethe shift lever is engaged in 1stgear for the manual transaxle orP (Park) for the automatictransaxle set the parking brake

(Continued)

• Do not place any movable objectsaround the driver’s seat as theymay move while driving, interferewith the driver and lead to anaccident.



5 5

is started.

Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the engine is not running to prevent battery

discharge.

E030204APB

START

Turn the ignition switch to the STARTposition to start the engine. The enginewill crank until you release the key; thenit returns to the ON position. The brakewarning light can be checked in this posi-tion.

transaxle, set the parking brakefully and shut the engine off.Unexpected and sudden vehiclemovement may occur if theseprecautions are not taken.

• Never reach for the ignitionswitch, or any other controlsthrough the steering wheel whilethe vehicle is in motion.The pres-ence of your hand or arm in thisarea could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol, an accident and seriousbodily injury or death.

(Continued)


Illuminated ENGINE START/STOPbutton

E030100ATD

Wh th f t d i d th

ENGINE START/STOP buttonposition

E030701ATD

OFF

To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-tion) or vehicle power (ON position),press the ENGINE START/STOP buttonwith the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-tion. When you press the ENGINESTART/STOP button without the shiftlever in the P (Park) position, theENGINE START/STOP button will not

In addition, if the ENGINE START/STOPbutton is in the OFF position after the dri-ver's door is opened, the steering wheelwill not lock and the warning chime willsound. In such a situation, close the door.Then the steering wheel will lock and thewarning chime will stop.

✽ NOTICE

If the steering wheel doesn't unlockproperly, the ENGINE START/STOPbutton will not work. Press the ENGINESTART/STOP button while turning thesteering wheel right and left to releasethe tension.

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

OTD059002

Not illuminated

CAUTION



65

Whenever the front door is opened, theENGINE START/STOP button will illumi-nate for your convenience. The light will

go off after about 30 seconds when thedoor is closed.

ENGINE START/STOP button will notchange to the OFF position but to theACC position.

Also, the steering wheel locks when theENGINE START/STOP button is in theOFF position to protect you against theft.It locks when the door is opened or whenyou pull out the smart key from the smartkey holder.

If the steering wheel is not locked prop-erly when you open the driver's door, thewarning chime will sound. Try locking thesteering wheel again. If the problem isnot solved, have it checked by an author-

ized KIA dealer.

CAUTIONYou are able to turn off the engine (START/RUN) or vehicle power (ON),only when the vehicle is not in motion. In an emergency situation while the vehicle is in motion, you are able to turn the engine off and to the ACC position by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 2 seconds or 3 times successively within 3 seconds.If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the engine without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button with the shift lever in the N

(Neutral) position.


E030202AHM

ACC(Accessory)

Press the ENGINE START/STOP buttonwhile it is in the OFF position without

depressing the brake pedal.The steering wheel unlocks and electri-cal accessories are operational.If the ENGINE START/STOP button is inthe ACC position for more than 1 hour,the button is turned off automatically toprevent battery discharge.

E030203AHM

ON

Press the ENGINE START/STOP buttonwhile it is in the ACC position without

depressing the brake pedal.The warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. Do not leavethe ENGINE START/STOP button in theON position for a long time. The batterymay discharge, because the engine isnot running.

E030704ATD

START/RUN

To start the engine, depress the brakepedal and press the ENGINE START/

STOP button with the shift lever in the P(Park) or the N (Neutral) position. Foryour safety, start the engine with the shiftlever in the P (Park) position.

✽ NOTICEIf you press the ENGINE START/STOPbutton without depressing the brake

Orange indicator Green indicator Not illuminated



5 7

button without depressing the brakepedal, the engine will not start and thebutton will change as follow:OFF➔ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF


E030205AHM

✽ NOTICEIf you leave the ENGINE START/ STOPbutton in the ACC or ON position for along time, the battery will discharge.

WARNING• Never press the ENGINE START/

STOP button while the vehicle isin motion. This would result inloss of directional control andbraking function, which couldcause an accident.

• The anti-theft steering columnlock is not a substitute for theparking brake. Before leaving the

(Continued)

• Never reach for the ENGINESTART/STOP button or any othercontrols through the steeringwheel while the vehicle is inmotion. The presence of yourhand or arm in the area couldcause loss of vehicle control, anaccident and serious bodilyinjury or death.

• Do not place any movable objectsaround the driver's seat as theymay move while driving, interferewith the driver and lead to anaccident.



85

parking brake. Before leaving thedriver's seat, always make surethe shift lever is engaged in P(Park), set the parking brake fullyand shut the engine off.Unexpected and sudden vehiclemovement may occur if theseprecautions are not taken.

(Continued)


E040000APB

E040100ATD-EU

Starting the engine with an igni-tion key (if equipped)

1. Make sure the parking brake isapplied.

2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the

3. Turn the ignition switch to START andhold it there until the engine starts (amaximum of 10 seconds), thenrelease the key.

4. In extremely cold weather (below-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle hasnot been operated for several days, letthe engine warm up without depress-ing the accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, it should be started without depressing the accelerator.

STARTING THE ENGINE

WARNINGAlways wear appropriate shoeswhen operating your vehicle.Unsuitable shoes (high heels, skiboots,etc.) may interfere with yourability to use the brake, acceleratorpedal, and clutch (if equipped).

CAUTIONIf the engine stalls while the vehicle is in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

CAUTIONDo not engage the starter for more than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-engaging the starter.Improper use of the starter may damage it.



5 9

2. Manual Transaxle Depress theclutch pedal fully and shift thetransaxle into Neutral. Keep the clutchpedal and brake pedal depressedwhile turning the ignition switch to thestart position.

Automatic Transaxle - Place thetransaxle shift lever in P (Park).Depress the brake pedal fully.

You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)position.

( ) ption. If traffic and road conditions permit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the

vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine.




✽ NOTICE• If the battery is weak or the smart key

does not work correctly, you can startthe engine by inserting the smart keyi h k h ld Wh

(Continued)• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you

can't start the engine normally.Replace the fuse with a new one. If itis not possible, you can start theengine by pressing the ENGINESTART/STOP button for 10 secondswhile it is in the ACC position. Theengine can start without depressing

the brake pedal. But for your safetyalways depress the brake pedal beforestarting the engine.

CAUTIONDo not press the ENGINE START/ STOP button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp

OTD051004



5 11

in the smart key holder. When youpull out the smart key from the smartkey holder, press the smart key and

pull it out.(Continued)

p p pfuse is blown.


E050100ATD

Manual transaxle operation

The manual transaxle has 6 forwardgears.

This shift pattern is imprinted on the shiftknob. The transaxle is fully synchronizedin all forward gears so shifting to either ahigher or a lower gear is easily accom-plished.

Depress the clutch pedal down fully whileshifting, then release it slowly.

If your vehicle is equipped with an igni-tion lock switch, the engine will not startwhen starting the engine withoutdepressing the clutch pedal.

The shift lever must be returned to theneutral position before shifting into R(R ) Th i (1) l d b l h

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

The shift lever can be moved withoutpulling the ring (1).

The ring (1) must be pulled while mov-

CAUTION• When downshifting from fifth

gear to fourth gear, caution should be taken not to inadvertently press the shift lever side- ways in such a manner that the second gear is engaged. Such a drastic downshift may cause the

engine speed to increase to the point that the tachometer will enter the red-zone. Such over- revving of the engine may possibly cause engine and transaxle damage.

• Do not downshift more than 2 gears or downshift the gear when the engine is running at high



125

E050000AUN

(Reverse).The ring (1) located below theshift knob must be pulled upward whilemoving the shift lever to the R (Reverse)

position.Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into R (Reverse).

Never operate the engine with the tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.

OTD051006

g ( ) p

ing the shift lever.g g g

speed (5,000 RPM or higher).Such a downshifting may damage

the engine and transaxle.


• During cold weather, shifting may bedifficult until the transaxle lubricant iswarmed up. This is normal and notharmful to the transaxle.

• If you've come to a complete stop andit's hard to shift into 1st or R (Reverse),leave the shift lever at neutral positionand release the clutch. Depress theclutch pedal back down, and then shift

into 1st or R (Reverse) gear position.

E050101APB

Using the clutch

The clutch should be depressed all theway to the floor before shifting, thenreleased slowly. The clutch pedal shouldalways be fully released while driving.Donot rest your foot on the clutch pedalwhile driving. This can cause unneces-sary wear. Do not partially engage the

clutch to hold the vehicle on an incline.This causes unnecessary wear. Use thefoot brake or parking brake to hold thevehicle on an incline. Do not operate theclutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

E050102APB

Downshifting

When you must slow down in heavy traf

CAUTION• To avoid premature clutch wear

and damage, do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch to hold the vehicle on an uphill

d hil i i f ffi

WARNING• Before leaving the driver’s seat,

always set the parking brake fullyand shut the engine off. Thenmake sure the transaxle is shiftedinto 1st gear when the vehicle isparked on a level or uphill grade,and shifted into R (Reverse) on a

downhill grade. Unexpected andsudden vehicle movement canoccur if these precautions are notfollowed in the order identified.



5 13

When you must slow down in heavy traf-fic or while driving up steep hills, down-shift before the engine starts to labor.

Downshifting reduces the chance ofstalling and gives better accelerationwhen you need to increase your speedagain. When the vehicle is traveling downsteep hills, downshifting helps maintainsafe speed and prolongs brake life.

grade, while waiting for a traffic light, etc.

• Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks.


E050200APB

Good driving practices

• Never take the vehicle out of gear andcoast down a hill. This is extremelyhazardous. Always leave the vehicle ingear.

• Don't "ride" the brakes.This can causethem to overheat and malfunction.Instead, when you are driving down a

long hill, shift to a lower gear. Whenyou do this, engine braking will helpslow down the vehicle.

• Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. This will help avoid over-revvingthe engine, which can cause damage.

• Slow down when you encounter crosswinds.This gives you much better con-trol of your vehicle.

WARNING• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-cantly more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed than a properlybelted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steeringwheel movements, such as sharplane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatlyincreased if you lose control ofyour vehicle at highway speeds.

• Losing control often occurs if twoor more wheels drop off the road-way and the driver oversteers to



145

y

• Be sure the vehicle is completelystopped before you attempt to shift into

R (Reverse). The transaxle can bedamaged if you do not. To shift into R(Reverse), depress the clutch, movethe shift lever to neutral, wait three sec-onds, then shift to the R (Reverse)position.

• Exercise extreme caution when drivingon a slippery surface. Be especiallycareful when braking, accelerating orshifting gears. On a slippery surface,an abrupt change in vehicle speed can

cause the drive wheels to lose tractionand the vehicle to go out of control.

way and the driver oversteers toreenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharply.Instead, slow down before pullingback into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-its.


E060100ATD-EU

Automatic transaxle operation

The automatic transaxle has 6 forwardspeeds and one reverse speed.The indi-vidual speeds are selected automatically,depending on the position of the shiftlever.

✽ NOTICEThe first few shifts on a new vehicle, if the battery has been disconnected, maybe somewhat abrupt. This is a normalcondition, and the shifting sequence willadjust after shifts are cycled a few timesby the TCM (Transaxle ControlModule) or PCM (Powertrain ControlModule).

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

+

+ (

(U

UP

P)

)

Lock release

button



5 15

E060000ATD

OTD051007

Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting.

The shift lever can be shifted freely.

Press the button when shifting.

-- ((DDOOWWNN))


For smooth operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear.

E060101ATD-EU

Transaxle ranges

The indicator light in the instrument clus-ter displays the shift lever position whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop beforeshifting into P (Park). This position locks

the transaxle and prevents the frontwheels from rotating.

WARNING - Automatictransaxle

• Always check the surroundingareas near your vehicle for peo-ple, especially children, beforeshifting a shift lever into D (Drive)or R (Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,always make sure the shift leveris in the P (Park) position; thenset the parking brake fully andshut the engine off. Unexpectedand sudden vehicle movementcan occur if these precautions

CAUTION• To avoid damage to your

transaxle, do not accelerate the engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes on.

• When stopped on an upgrade, do not hold the vehicle with engine

power. Use the service brake or the parking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R (Reverse) when the engine is above idle speed.



165

can occur if these precautionsare not followed in the order iden-tified.




Sports mode

Whether the vehicle is stopped or inmotion, sports mode is selected by push-ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-tion into the manual gate. To return to D(D i ) i h h hif

Up (+) : Push the lever forward once toshift up one gear.

Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards onceto shift down one gear.

✽ NOTICE• In sports mode, the driver must exe-

cute upshifts in accordance with roadconditions, taking care to keep the

engine speed below the red zone.• In sports mode, only the 6 forward

gears can be selected. To reverse orpark the vehicle, move the shift leverto the R (Reverse) or P (Park) positionas required.

• In sports mode, downshifts are madeautomatically when the vehicle slowsdown. When the vehicle stops, 1st geari t ti ll l t d

(Continued)• When driving on a slippery road,

push the shift lever forward into the+(up) position. This causes thetransaxle to shift into the 2nd (or 3rd)gear which is better for smooth driv-ing on a slippery road. Push the shiftlever to the -(down) side to shift backto the 1st gear.

OTD051008

+

+ (

(U

UP

P)

)

- (DOWN)

Sports mode



185

(Drive) range operation, push the shiftlever back into the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift leverbackwards and forwards will allow you tomake gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to amanual transaxle, the sports modeallows gearshifts with the acceleratorpedal depressed.

is automatically selected.• In sports mode, when the engine rpm

approaches the red zone shift pointsare varied to upshift automatically.• To maintain the required levels of

vehicle performance and safety, thesystem may not execute certaingearshifts when the shift lever is oper-ated.

(Continued)


Paddle shifter (if equipped)

The paddle shifter is available when theshift lever is in the D position or the sportmode.

With the shift lever in the D position

The paddle shifter can operate when thevehicle speed is more than 10km/h.

Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once toshift up or down one gear and the systemchanges from automatic mode to manualmode.

If the vehicle speed is lower than 10km/h,if you depressing the accelerator pedal

for more than 7 seconds or if you shift theshift lever from D to sports mode andshift it from sports mode to D again, thesystem change from manual mode toautomatic mode.

With the shift lever in the sports mode

Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once toshift up or down one gear.

E060102ATD

Shift lock system (if equipped)

For your safety, the automatic transaxlehas a shift lock system which preventsshifting the transaxle out of P (Park)unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transaxle from P (Park) into R(Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON position.

3. Move the shift lever.

If the brake pedal is repeatedlydepressed and released with the shiftlever in the P (Park) position, a chatteringnoise near the shift lever may be heard.This is a normal condition.

OTD051041



5 19

✽ NOTICEIf you pull the [+] and [-] paddle shiftersat the same time, you can't shift the gear.

WARNING

Always fully depress the brakepedal before and while shifting outof the P (Park) position into anoth-er position to avoid inadvertentmotion of the vehicle which couldinjure persons in or around thevehicle.


Type A

1. Carefully remove the cap covering theshift-lock access hole (1).

2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into theaccess hole and press down on thekey (or screwdriver).


4. Have your vehicle inspected by anauthorized KIA dealer immediately.

Type B

1. Press the shift-lock release button.


3. Have your vehicle inspected by anauthorized KIA dealer immediately.

E060103AUN

Ignition key interlock system (if equipped)

The ignition key cannot be removedunless the shift lever is in the P (Park)position.

OTD051040N

■ Type A

■ Type B



205

Shift-lock override

If the shift lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) or N (Neutral) position intothe R (Reverse) position with the brakepedal depressed, continue depressingthe brake, then do the following:

OTD051009


E060200APB

Good driving practices

• Never move the shift lever from P(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-tion with the accelerator pedaldepressed.

• Never move the shift lever into P (Park)when the vehicle is in motion.

• Be sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before you attempt to shift intoR (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Never take the vehicle out of gear andcoast down a hill. This may beextremely hazardous.Always leave thecar in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This cancause them to overheat and malfunc-tion. Instead, when you are drivingd l hill l d d hift t

• Exercise extreme caution when drivingon a slippery surface. Be especiallycareful when braking, accelerating orshifting gears. On a slippery surface,an abrupt change in vehicle speed cancause the drive wheels to lose tractionand the vehicle to go out of control.

• Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothlydepressing and releasing the accelera-tor pedal.

WARNING• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-cantly more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed than a properlybelted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steeringwheel movements, such as sharplane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatlyincreased if you lose control ofyour vehicle at highway speeds.

• Losing control often occurs if twoor more wheels drop off the road-way and the driver oversteers toreenter the road a



5 21

down a long hill, slow down and shift toa lower gear. When you do this, engine

braking will help slow down the vehicle.• Slow down before shifting to a lower

gear. Otherwise, the lower gear maynot be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake. Do notdepend on placing the transaxle in P(Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.

reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leaves

the roadway, do not steer sharply.Instead, slow down before pullingback into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-its.


E060203AFD

Moving up a steep grade from a stand- ing start

To move up a steep grade from a stand-ing start, depress the brake pedal, shiftthe shift lever to D (Drive). Select theappropriate gear depending on loadweight and steepness of the grade, andrelease the parking brake. Depress theaccelerator gradually while releasing theservice brakes.

WARNINGIf your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then youmay attempt to rock the vehicle freeby moving it forward and backward.Do not attempt this procedure ifpeople or objects are anywherenear the vehicle. During the rocking

operation the vehicle may suddenlymove forward of backward as itbecomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people orobjects.



225


E070100AUN

Power brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakesthat adjust automatically through normalusage.

In the event that the power-assistedbrakes lose power because of a stalledengine or some other reason, you canstill stop your vehicle by applying greater

force to the brake pedal than you nor-mally would.The stopping distance, how-ever, will be longer.

When the engine is not running, thereserve brake power is partially depletedeach time the brake pedal is applied. Donot pump the brake pedal when thepower assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when neces-sary to maintain steering control on slip-

E070101AUN

In the event of brake failure

If service brakes fail to operate while thevehicle is in motion, you can make anemergency stop with the parking brake.The stopping distance, however, will bemuch greater than normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM

(Continued)

• When descending a long or steephill, shift to a lower gear andavoid continuous application ofthe brakes. Continuous brakeapplication will cause the brakesto overheat and could result in atemporary loss of braking per-formance.

• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-cle’s ability to sefely slow down;the vehicle may also pull to oneside when the brakes are applied.Applying the brakes lightly willindicate whether they have beenaffected in this way. Always testyour brakes in this fashion afterdriving through deep water. Todry the brakes apply them lightly

WARNING - Parking brake

Applying the parking brake whilethe vehicle is moving at normalspeeds can cause a sudden loss ofcontrol of the vehicle. If you mustuse the parking brake to stop thevehicle, use great caution in apply-ing the brake.



5 23

sary to maintain steering control on slip-pery surfaces.

dry the brakes, apply them lightlywhile maintaining a safe forward

speed until brake performancereturns to normal.WARNING - Brakes

• Do not drive with your foot rest-ing on the brake pedal. This willcreate abnormal high brake tem-peratures, excessive brake liningand pad wear, and increasedstopping distances.

(Continued)


E070102AHM

Disc brakes wear indicator

When your brake pads are worn and newpads are required, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your frontbrakes or rear brakes (if equipped). Youmay hear this sound come and go or itmay occur whenever you depress thebrake pedal.

Please remember that some driving con-ditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when you first apply (or lightlyapply) the brakes. This is normal anddoes not indicate a problem with yourbrakes.

E070106APB

Rear drum brakes (if equipped)

Your rear drum brakes do not have wearindicators.Therefore, have the rear brakelinings inspected if you hear a rubbingnoise. Also have your rear brakesinspected each time you change orrotate your tires and when you have thefront brakes replaced.

Parking brake

E070201APB

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, first applythe foot brake and then without pressingthe release b tton in p ll the parking

CAUTION• To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with worn

OTD059010



245

the release button in, pull the parkingbrake lever up as far as possible. In addi-

tion it is recommended that when parkingthe vehicle on a gradient, the shift levershould be positioned in the appropriatelow gear for manual transaxle vehicles orin the P (Park) position for automatictransaxle vehicles.

WARNING - Brake wearThis brake wear warning soundmeans your vehicle needs service.If you ignore this audible warning,you will eventually lose brakingperformance, which could lead to aserious accident.

not continue to drive with worn brake pads.

• Always replace the front or rear brake pads as pairs.

CAUTIONDriving with the parking brake applied will cause excessive brake pad (or lining) and brake rotor wear.


E070202APB

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, first applythe foot brake and pull up the parkingbrake lever slightly. Secondly, press therelease button (1) and lower the parking

Check the brake warning light by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine).This light will illuminate when theparking brake is applied with the ignitionswitch in the START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking brake

WARNING• To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leavingthe vehicle, do not use the shiftlever instead of the parkingbrake. Set the parking brake ANDmake sure the shift lever issecurely positioned in 1st (First)gear or R (Reverse) for manualtransaxle equipped vehicles andin P (Park) for automatictransaxle equipped vehicles.

• Never allow anyone who is unfa-miliar with the vehicle to touchthe parking brake. If the parkingbrake is released unintentionally,serious injury may occur.

• All vehicles should always have

OTD059011 W-75



5 25

( ) p gbrake lever (2) while holding the button.

g p gis fully released and the brake warning

light is off.If the brake warning light remains onafter the parking brake is released whilethe engine is running, there may be amalfunction in the brake system.Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, stop driving the vehicleimmediately. If that is not possible, useextreme caution while operating the vehi-cle and only continue to drive the vehicleuntil you can reach a safe location or

repair shop.

the parking brake fully engagedwhen parking to avoid inadver-tent movement of the vehiclewhich can injure occupants orpedestrians.


E070300AHM-EC

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)The ABS continuously senses the speedof the wheels. If the wheels are going tolock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-lates the hydraulic brake pressure to thewheels.

When you apply your brakes under con-ditions which may lock the wheels, youmay hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from thebrakes, or feel a corresponding sensationin the brake pedal. This is normal and it

means your ABS is active.In order to obtain the maximum benefitfrom your ABS in an emergency situa-tion, do not attempt to modulate yourbrake pressure and do not try to pumpyour brakes. Press your brake pedal ashard as possible or as hard as the situa-tion allows the ABS to control the forcebeing delivered to the brakes.

WARNINGABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-dents due to improper or danger-ous driving maneuvers. Eventhough vehicle control is improvedduring emergency braking, always

maintain a safe distance betweenyou and objects ahead. Vehiclespeeds should always be reducedduring extreme road conditions.

The braking distance for vehiclesequipped with an anti-lock brakingsystem (Electronic Stability ControlSystem) may be longer than forthose without it in the followingroad conditions.

(Continued)

The safety features of an ABS (orESC) equipped vehicle should notbe tested by high speed driving orcornering. This could endanger thesafety of yourself or others.



265

road conditions.

During these conditions the vehicle

should be driven at reducedspeeds:

• Rough, gravel or snow-coveredroads.

• On roads where the road surfaceis pitted or has different surfaceheight.

(Continued)


✽ NOTICEA click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the vehiclebegins to move after the engine is start-ed. These conditions are normal andindicate that the anti-lock brake systemis functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake system,your vehicle still requires sufficientstopping distance. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you.

• Always slow down when cornering.The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from exces-sive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,operation of the anti-lock brake system

lt i l t i di

✽ NOTICEWhen you jump start your vehicle

W-78

CAUTION• If the ABS warning light is on and

stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. In this case, however, your regular brakes will work

CAUTION• When you drive on a road with

poor traction, such as an icy road,and have operated your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light may illuminate. Pull your vehicle over to a safe place and stop the engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS system is normal. Otherwise, you may have a problem with the ABS.Contact an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible.



5 27

may result in a longer stopping dis-tance than for vehicles equipped with aconventional brake system.

When you jump start your vehiclebecause of a drained battery, the engine

may not run as smoothly and the ABSwarning light may turn on at the sametime. This happens because of the lowbattery voltage. It does not mean yourABS has malfunctioned.• Do not pump your brakes!• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

, y gnormally.

• The ABS warning light will stay on for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition switch is ON. During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. Contact an authorized KIA dealer as soon as possible.




E070501AUN-EU

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turnedON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-cator lights illuminate forapproximately 3 seconds,then ESC is turned on.

• Press the ESC OFF buttonfor at least half a second afterturning the ignition ON to turnESC off. (ESC OFF indicatorwill illuminate). To turn theESC on, press the ESC OFFbutton (ESC OFF indicatorlight will go off).

• When starting the engine,you may hear a slight tickingsound. This is the ESC per-forming an automatic system

When operating

When the ESC is in operation,ESC indicator light blinks.

• When the Electronic StabilityControl is operating properly,you can feel a slight pulsationin the vehicle. This is only theeffect of brake control andindicates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mudor slippery road, pressing theaccelerator pedal may notcause the engine rpm (revo-lutions per minute) toincrease.

E070502AUN-EU

ESC operation off

ESC OFF state

• To cancel ESC operation,press the ESC OFF button(ESC OFF indicator light illu-minates).

• If the ignition switch is turnedto LOCK position when ESCis off, ESC remains off. Uponrestarting the engine, theESC will automatically turnon again.

-



5 29

forming an automatic systemself-check and does not indi-cate a problem.


E070503AUN-EU

Indicator light

When the ignition switch is turned ON,the indicator light illuminates, then goesoff if ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks wheneverESC is operating.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever

E070504ATD-EU

ESC OFF usage

When driving

• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turnedon for daily dr iving whenever possible.

• To turn ESC off while driving, press theESC OFF button while driving on a flatroad surface.

Never press the ESC OFF button while

ESC is operating (ESC indicator lightblinks).

If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat-ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.

✽ NOTICE• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that the ESC isturned off (ESC OFF light illuminat-ed). If the ESC is left on, it may pre-

■ ESC indicator light

■ ESC OFF indicator light

CAUTIONDriving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are the same size as your original tires.

WARNINGThe Electronic Stability Control sys-tem is only a driving aid; use pre-cautions for safe driving by slowingdown on curved, snowy, or icyroads. Drive slowly and don’tattempt to accelerate whenever theESC indicator light is blinking, orwhen the road surface is slippery.



305

The ESC indicator light blinks wheneverESC is operating or illuminates whenESC fails to operate.The ESC OFF indicator light comes onwhen the ESC is turned off with the but-ton.

) , y pvent the vehicle speed from increas-

ing, and result in false diagnosis.• Turning the ESC off does not affect

the ABS or brake system operation.


E070600ATD

Good braking practices• Driving through water may get the

brakes wet. They can also get wetwhen the vehicle is washed. Wetbrakes can be dangerous! Your vehiclewill not stop as quickly if the brakes arewet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicleto pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakeslightly until the braking action returns tonormal, taking care to keep the vehicle

under control at all times. If the brakingaction does not return to normal, stopas soon as it is safe to do so and callan authorized KIA dealer for assis-tance.

• Don't coast down hills with the vehicleout of gear. This is extremely haz-ardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at alltimes, use the brakes to slow down,then shift to a lower gear so that

WARNINGNever press the ESC OFF buttonwhile ESC is operating.

If the ESC is turned off while ESC isoperating, the vehicle may go out ofcontrol.

To turn ESC off while driving, pressthe ESC OFF button while drivingon a flat road surface.

WARNING• Whenever you leave or park your

vehicle, always set the parkingbrake as far as possible and fullyengage the vehicle's transaxleinto the P (Park) position. If the

parking brake is not fullyengaged, the vehicle may moveinadvertently and injure yourselfand others.

• All vehicles should always havethe parking brake fully engagedwhen parking to avoid inadver-tent movement of the vehiclewhich can injure occupants orpedestrians.



5 31

• Check to be sure the parking brake isnot engaged and that the parkingbrake indicator light is out before driv-ing away.

engine braking will help you maintain a

safe speed.• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting

your foot on the brake pedal while driv-ing can be dangerous because thebrakes might overheat and lose theireffectiveness. It also increases thewear of the brake components.


• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,apply the brakes gently and keep thevehicle pointed straight ahead whileyou slow down. When you are movingslowly enough for it to be safe to do so,pull off the road and stop in a safeplace.

• If your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transaxle, don't let your vehi-cle creep forward. To avoid creeping

forward, keep your foot firmly on thebrake pedal when the vehicle isstopped.

• Be cautious when parking on a hill.Firmly engage the parking brake andplace the shift lever in P (automatictransaxle) or in first or reverse gear(manual transaxle). If your vehicle isfacing downhill, turn the front wheelsinto the curb to help keep the vehicle

• Under some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engaged posi-tion.This is most likely to happen whenthere is an accumulation of snow or icearound or near the rear brakes or if thebrakes are wet. If there is a risk that theparking brake may freeze, apply it onlytemporarily while you put the shift leverin P (automatic transaxle) or in first orreverse gear (manual transaxle) and

block the rear wheels so the vehiclecannot roll. Then release the parkingbrake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgradewith the accelerator pedal. This cancause the transaxle to overheat.Always use the brake pedal or parkingbrake.



325

from rolling. If your vehicle is facing

uphill, turn the front wheels away fromthe curb to help keep the vehicle fromrolling. If there is no curb or if it isrequired by other conditions to keepthe vehicle from rolling, block thewheels.


E090000AHM-EU

The cruise control system allows you toprogram the vehicle to maintain a con-stant speed without depressing theaccelerator pedal.

This system is designed to functionabove approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

E090100ATD-EU

To set cruise control speed:

1. Press the CRUISE ON-OFF button onthe steering wheel to turn the systemon. The CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

2 Accelerate to the desired speed which

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING

• If the cruise control is left on,(CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster illuminated)the cruise control can beswitched on accidentally. Keepthe cruise control system off(CRUISE indicator light OFF)when the cruise control is not inuse, to avoid inadvertently set-ting a speed.

• Use the cruise control system

(Continued)

• Pay particular attention to thedriving conditions wheneverusing the cruise control system.

• Be careful when driving downhillusing the cruise control system,which may increase the vehiclespeed.

OTD059020LCAUTION

During cruise-speed driving of a manual transaxle vehicle, do not shift into neutral without depressing the clutch pedal, since the engine will be overrevved. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal or release the cruise control ON- OFF switch.



5 33

✽ NOTICEDuring normal cruise control operation,when the SET switch is activated orreactivated after applying the brakes,the cruise control will energize afterapproximately 3 seconds. This delay isnormal.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which

must be more than 40 km/h (25 mph).

• Use the cruise control system

only when traveling on openhighways in good weather.

• Do not use the cruise controlwhen it may not be safe to keepthe vehicle at a constant speed,for instance, driving in heavy orvarying traffic, or on slippery(rainy, icy or snow-covered) orwinding roads or over 6% up-hillor down-hill roads.

(Continued)

OFF switch.


3. Move the lever (1) down (to SET-), andrelease it at the desired speed. TheSET indicator light in the instrumentcluster will illuminate.Release the accel-erator at the same time. The desiredspeed will automatically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow

E090200ATD-EU

To increase cruise control setspeed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) andhold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.Release the lever at the speed you

E090300ATD-EU

To decrease the cruising speed:

Follow either of these procedures:

• Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) andhold it. Your vehicle will gradually slowdown. Release the lever at the speedyou want to maintain

OTD059021L OTD059022L OTD059021L



345

p g ydown or speed up slightly while going downhill.

Release the lever at the speed you

want.• Move the lever (1) up (to RES+) and

release it immediately. The cruisingspeed will increase by 1.6 km/h (1.0mph) each time the lever is operated inthis manner.

you want to maintain.

• Move the lever (1) down (to SET-) andrelease it immediately. The cruisingspeed will decrease by 1.6 km/h (1.0mph) each time the lever is operated inthis manner.


E090400ATD

To temporarily accelerate with thecruise control on:

If you want to speed up temporarily whenthe cruise control is on, depress theaccelerator pedal. Increased speed willnot interfere with the cruise control oper-ation or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your footoff the accelerator.

E090500ATD-EU

To cancel cruise control, do oneof the following:

• Depress the brake pedal.

• Depress the clutch pedal with a manu-al transaxle.

• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic

Each of these actions will cancel cruise control operation (the SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume cruise control operation, move the lever up (to RES+). You will return to your previously preset speed.

OTD059023L



5 35

• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic

transaxle.• Press the CANCEL switch.

• Decrease the vehicle speed lower thanthe memory speed by 15 km/h (9 mph).

• Decrease the vehicle speed to lessthan approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).


E090600ATD-EU

To resume cruising speed atmore than approximately 40 km/h(25 mph):

If any method other than the CRUISEON-OFF switch was used to cancelcruising speed and the system is still

E090700ATD

To turn cruise control off, do oneof the following:

• Press the CRUISE ON-OFF button(the CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster will go off).

• Turn the ignition off.

Both of these actions will cancel the cruise control operation. If you want to

resume the cruise control operation,repeat the steps provided in “To set cruise control speed” on the previous page.

OTD059022L



365

g p y

activated, the most recent set speed willautomatically resume when you movethe lever (1) up (to RES+).

It will not resume, however, if the vehiclespeed has dropped below approximately40 km/h (25 mph).


E100000AHM-EC

Your vehicle's fuel economy dependsmainly on your style of driving, where youdrive and when you drive.

Each of these factors affects how manykilometers (miles) you can get from aliter (gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehi-cle as economically as possible, use thefollowing driving suggestions to helpsave money in both fuel and repairs:

• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" startsor full-throttle shifts and maintain asteady cruising speed. Don't racebetween stoplights. Try to adjust yourspeed to the traffic so you don't have tochange speeds unnecessarily. Avoidheavy traffic whenever possible.Always maintain a safe distance fromother vehicles so you can avoid unnec-essary braking This also reduces

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This canincrease fuel consumption and alsoincrease wear on these components.In addition, driving with your foot rest-ing on the brake pedal may cause thebrakes to overheat, which reducestheir effectiveness and may lead tomore serious consequences.

• Take care of your tires. Keep theminflated to the recommended pressure.

Incorrect inflation, either too much ortoo little, results in unnecessary tirewear. Check the tire pressures at leastonce a month.

• Be sure that the wheels are alignedcorrectly. Improper alignment canresult from hitting curbs or driving toofast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-ment causes faster tire wear and mayalso result in other problems as well asgreater fuel consumption

• Keep your vehicle in good condition.For better fuel economy and reducedmaintenance costs, maintain your vehi-cle in accordance with the mainte-nance schedule in section 7. If youdrive your vehicle in severe conditions,more frequent maintenance is required(see section 7 for details).

• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximumservice, your vehicle should be kept

clean and free of corrosive materials. Itis especially important that mud, dirt,ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulateon the underside of the vehicle. Thisextra weight can result in increasedfuel consumption and also contributeto corrosion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your vehicle. Weight reducesfuel economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than

ECONOMICAL OPERATION



5 37

essary braking. This also reduces

brake wear.• Drive at a moderate speed. The faster

you drive, the more fuel your vehicleuses. Driving at a moderate speed,especially on the highway, is one of themost effective ways to reduce fuel con-sumption.

greater fuel consumption. • Don t let the engine idle longer than

necessary. If you are waiting (and notin traffic), turn off your engine andrestart only when you're ready to go.


• Remember, your vehicle does notrequire extended warm-up. After theengine has started, allow the engine torun for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-ing the vehicle in gear. In very coldweather, however, give your engine aslightly longer warm-up period.

• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.Lugging is driving too slowly in a veryhigh gear resulting in engine bucking. If

this happens, shift to a lower gear.Over-revving is racing the enginebeyond its safe limit.This can be avoid-ed by shifting at the recommendedspeed.

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.The air conditioning system is operat-ed by engine power so your fuel econ-omy is reduced when you use it.

• Open windows at high speeds canreduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswindsand headwinds. To help offset some ofthis loss, slow down when driving inthese conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-dition is important both for economy andsafety. Therefore, have an authorized KIAdealer perform scheduled inspectionsand maintenance.

WARNING - Engine off dur-ing motion

Never turn the engine off to coastdown hills or anytime the vehicle isin motion. The power steering andpower brakes will not functionproperly without the engine run-ning. Instead, keep the engine onand downshift to an appropriate

gear for engine braking effect. Inaddition, turning off the ignitionwhile driving could engage thesteering wheel lock resulting inloss of vehicle steering whichcould cause serious injury ordeath.



385


E110100APA-EC

Hazardous driving conditions

When hazardous driving conditions areencountered such as water, snow, ice,mud, sand, or similar hazards, followthese suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-tance for braking.

• Avoid sudden braking or steering.

• When braking with non-ABS brakespump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle isstopped.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, usesecond gear. Accelerate slowly toavoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt, or other non-slipmaterial under the drive wheels to pro-vide traction when stalled in ice, snow,or mud.

E110200AAM-EU

Rocking the vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to freeit from snow, sand, or mud, first turn thesteering wheel right and left to clear thearea around your front wheels.Then, shiftback and forth between 1st (First) and R(Reverse) in vehicles equipped with amanual transaxle or R (Reverse) and anyforward gear in vehicles equipped with an

automatic transaxle. Do not race theengine, and spin the wheels as little aspossible. If you are still stuck after a fewtries, have the vehicle pulled out by a towvehicle to avoid engine overheating andpossible damage to the transaxle.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

WARNING - Downshifting

Downshifting with an automatictransaxle, while driving on slipperysurfaces can cause an accident.The sudden change in tire speedcould cause the tires to skid. Becareful when downshifting on slip-pery surfaces.

WARNING - ABSDo not pump the brake pedal on avehicle equipped with ABS. CAUTION

Prolonged rocking may cause engine overheating, transaxle dam-



5 39

g g

age or failure, and tire damage.


✽ NOTICEThe ESC system (if equipped) should beturned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle. E110300AUN

Smooth cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in cor-ners, especially when roads are wet.Ideally, corners should always be takenunder gentle acceleration. If you followthese suggestions, tire wear will be heldto a minimum

E110400AUN

Driving at night

Because night driving presents morehazards than driving in the daylight, hereare some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distancebetween you and other vehicles, as it

OUN056051 OMC035004

WARNING - Spinning tiresDo not spin the wheels, especiallyat speeds more than 56 km/h (35mph). Spinning the wheels at highspeeds when the vehicle is station-ary could cause a tire to overheatwhich could result in tire damagethat may injure bystanders.

WARNINGIf your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then youmay attempt to rock the vehicle freeby moving it forward and backward.



405

to a minimum.may be more difficult to see at night,especially in areas where there maynot be any street lights.

y g

Do not attempt this procedure ifpeople or objects are anywherenear the vehicle. During the rockingoperation the vehicle may suddenlymove forward or backward as itbecomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people orobjects.


• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glarefrom other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and prop-erly aimed on vehicles not equippedwith the automatic headlight aimingfeature. Dirty or improperly aimedheadlights will make it much more diffi-cult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlightsof oncoming vehicles. You could be

temporarily blinded, and it will takeseveral seconds for your eyes to read- just to the darkness.

E110500AUN

Driving in the rain

Rain and wet roads can make drivingdangerous, especially if you’re not pre-pared for the slick pavement. Here are afew things to consider when driving in therain:

• If your tires are not in good condition,making a quick stop on wet pavementcan cause a skid and possibly lead toan accident. Be sure your tires are ingood shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-ier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddlescan affect your brakes. If you must gothrough puddles, try to drive through

them slowly.• If you believe you may have gotten

your brakes wet, apply them lightlywhile driving until normal braking oper-ation returns.

E110600AUN

Driving in flooded areas

Avoid driving through flooded areasunless you are sure the water is no high-

1JBB3303



5 41

• A heavy rainfall will make it harder tosee and will increase the distanceneeded to stop your vehicle, so slowdown.

• Keep your windshield wiping equip-ment in good shape. Replace yourwindshield wiper blades when theyshow signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield.

er than the bottom of the wheel hub.Drive through any water slowly. Allowadequate stopping distance becausebrake performance may be affected.

After driving through water, dry thebrakes by gently applying them severaltimes while the vehicle is moving slowly.


E110700AUN

Highway driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation pressures tospecification. Low tire inflation pressureswill result in overheating and possiblefailure of the tires.

Avoid using worn or damaged tires whichmay result in reduced traction or tire fail-ure.

✽ NOTICENever exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure shown on the tires.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil

High speed travel consumes more fuelthan urban motoring. Do not forget tocheck both the engine coolant andengine oil.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may over-heat the engine.

WARNING• Underinflated or overinflated

tires can cause poor handling,loss of vehicle control, and sud-den tire failure leading to acci-dents, injuries, and even death.Always check the tires for properinflation before driving. For prop-er tire pressures, refer to “Tires

and wheels” in section 8.• Driving on tires with no or insuffi-

cient tread is dangerous. Worn-out tires can result in loss ofvehicle control, collisions, injury,and even death. Worn-out tiresshould be replaced as soon aspossible and should never beused for driving. Always checkthe tire tread before driving yourvehicle. For further information



425

and tread limits, refer to “Tiresand wheels” in section 7.


E120000ASA

Severe weather conditions in the winterresult in greater wear and other prob-lems. To minimize the problems of winterdriving, you should follow these sugges-tions:

E120100AUN-EC

Snowy or Icy conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it maybe necessary to use snow tires on yourtires. If snow tires are needed, it is nec-essary to select tires equivalent in sizeand type of the original equipment tires.Failure to do so may adversely affect thesafety and handling of your car.Furthermore, speeding, rapid accelera-

tion, sudden brake applications, andsharp turns are potentially very haz-ardous practices.During deceleration, use engine brakingto the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-cations on snowy or icy roads may causeskids. You need to keep sufficient dis-tance between the vehicle in operation infront and your vehicle. Also, apply thebrake gently.

E120101AUN

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,make sure they are radial tires of thesame size and load range as the originaltires. Mount snow tires on all four wheelsto balance your vehicle’s handling in allweather conditions. Keep in mind that thetraction provided by snow tires on dryroads may not be as high as your vehi-

cle's original equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roads areclear. Check with the tire dealer for max-imum speed recommendations.

WINTER DRIVING

WARNING - Snow tire sizeSnow tires should be equivalent insize and type to the vehicle's stan-dard tires. Otherwise, the safetyand handling of your vehicle maybe adversely affected

1JBB3305



5 43

Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

be adversely affected.


E120200AUN

Use high quality ethylene glycolcoolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high qualityethylene glycol coolant in the coolingsystem. It is the only type of coolant thatshould be used because it helps preventcorrosion in the cooling system, lubri-cates the water pump and preventsfreezing. Be sure to replace or replenish

your coolant in accordance with themaintenance schedule in section 7.Before winter, have your coolant tested toassure that its freezing point is sufficientfor the temperatures anticipated duringthe winter.

E120300AUN

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the

E120400BUN

Change to "winter weight" oil ifnecessary

In some climates it is recommended thata lower viscosity "winter weight" oil beused during cold weather. See section 8for recommendations. If you aren't surewhat weight oil you should use, consultan authorized KIA dealer.

E120500AUN

Check spark plugs and ignitionsystem

Inspect your spark plugs as described insection 7 and replace them if necessary.Also check all ignition wiring and compo-nents to be sure they are not cracked,worn or damaged in any way.

E120600AUN

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squir t anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine intothe key opening. If a lock is covered withice, squirt it with an approved de-icingfluid to remove the ice. If the lock isfrozen internally, you may be able to thawit out by using a heated key. Handle theheated key with care to avoid injury.

E120700AUN

Use approved window washeranti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washersystem from freezing, add an approvedwindow washer anti-freeze solution inaccordance with instructions on the con-tainer. Window washer anti-freeze isavailable from an authorized KIA dealer



445

battery system. Visually inspect the bat-tery and cables as described in section7. The level of charge in your battery canbe checked by an authorized KIA dealeror a service station.

and most auto parts outlets. Do not useengine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paintfinish.


E120800APB

Don't let your parking brakefreeze

Under some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engaged position.This is most likely to happen when thereis an accumulation of snow or ice aroundor near the rear brakes or if the brakesare wet. If there is a risk the parkingbrake may freeze, apply it only temporar-

ily while you put the shift lever in P (auto-matic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear(manual transaxle) and block the rearwheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Thenrelease the parking brake.

E120900AHM

Don't let ice and snow accumu-late underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice

E121000ASA-EC

Carry emergency equipment

Depending on the severity of the weath-er you should carry appropriate emer-gency equipment. Some of the items youmay want to carry include tow straps orchains, flashlight, emergency flares,sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a windowscraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, ablanket, etc.

E14000ABH

We do not recommend using thisvehicle for trailer towing.

TRAILER TOWING



5 45

can build up under the fenders and inter-fere with the steering. When driving insevere winter conditions where this mayhappen, you should periodically checkunderneath the vehicle to be sure themovement of the front wheels and thesteering components is not obstructed.


E150100AUN

Tire and loading information label

The label located on the driver's doorsill gives the original tire size, coldtire pressures recommended for yourvehicle, the number of people thatcan be in your vehicle and vehiclecapacity weight.

E150101AAM

Vehicle capacity weight:

385 kg (849 lbs.)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weightincludes the tongue load.

E150102AAM

Seating capacity:

Total : 5 persons(Front seat : 2 persons,Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximumnumber of occupants including adriver, your vehicle may carry.

However, the seating capacity may

be reduced based upon the weight ofall of the occupants, and the weightof the cargo being carried or towed.

Do not overload the vehicle as thereis a limit to the total weight, or loadlimit including occupants and cargo,the vehicle can carry.

OTD050030N

OTD050031N

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT



465

OTD050032N


E150103AAM

Towing capacity:

We do not recommend using thisvehicle for trailer towing.

E150104AUN

Cargo capacity:

The cargo capacity of your vehiclewill increase or decrease dependingon the weight and the number ofoccupants and the tongue load, ifyour vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

E150105AUN-C1

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement "The com-bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example, ifthe "XXX" amount equals 385 kg(849 lbs.), and there will be five 68

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-er, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of yourvehicle.

✽ NOTICEWe do not recommend using thisvehicle for trailer towing.



5 47

kg (150 lbs.) passengers in yourvehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacityis 45 kg (99 lbs.).

(385-340 (5 x 68) = 45 kg or 849-750 (5 x 150) = 99 lbs.)


C190F03JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 385 kg

Weight (849 lbs)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight365 kg

73 kg (161 lbs) × 5(805 lbs)

A B C

Example 3

C190F02JM



Weight (849 lbs)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight340 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 5(750 lbs)

A B C

Example 2

C190F01JM



Weight (849 lbs)

Subtract Occupant

B Weight136 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 2(300 lbs)

Example 1

A B C



485

CAvailable Cargo and 20 kg

Luggage weight (44 lbs)C

Available Cargo and 45 kg

Luggage weight (99 lbs)C

Available Cargo and 249 kg

Luggage weight (549 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weightand seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle'scapacity weight.


E150200AUN

Certification label

The certification label is located onthe driver's door sill at the center pil-lar.

This label shows the maximumallowable weight of the fully loaded

hi l Thi i ll d th GVWR

To find out the actual loads on yourfront and rear axles, you need to goto a weigh station and weigh yourvehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on both sides of the center-line.

The label will help you decide howmuch cargo and installed equipmentyour vehicle can carry.

OEN056020

WARNING - Over loading

• Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle, the GAWR foreither the front or rear axleand vehicle capacity weight.Exceeding these ratings cancause an accident or vehicledamage.You can calculate theweight of your load by weigh-ing the items (or people)before putting them in thevehicle. Be careful not to over-l d hi l

(Continued)

• Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR, eitherthe maximum front or rearGAWR and vehicle capacityweight. If you do, parts,including tires on your vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way your vehicle handles

and braking ability. This couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehi-cle.



5 49

vehicle. This is called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel andcargo.

This label also tells you the maxi-mum weight that can be supportedby the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

If you carry items inside your vehicle- like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else - they are moving asfast as the vehicle. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash,the items will keep going and cancause an injury if they strike the driv-er or a passenger.

load your vehicle.(Continued)


WARNING• Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in yourvehicle's tires and possibletire failure that could lead to acrash.

• Overloading your vehicle cancause increased stopping dis-

tances that could lead to acrash.

• A crash resulting from poorhandling vehicle damage, tirefailure, or increased stoppingdistances could result in seri-ous injury or death.

WARNING - Loose cargoItems you carry inside yourvehicle can strike and injureoccupants in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

• Put items in the cargo area ofyour vehicle.Try to spread theweight evenly.

• Never stack items, like suit-cases, inside the vehicleabove the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure it.

• Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

CAUTION• Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

• Using heavier suspension components to get added durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.



505


E160000AUN

This section will guide you in the properloading of your vehicle and/or trailer, tokeep your loaded vehicle weight within itsdesign rating capability, with or without atrailer. Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of the vehicledesign performance. Before loading yourvehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-lowing terms for determining your vehi-cle's weight ratings, with or without atrailer, from the vehicle's specificationsand the compliance label:

E160100AUN

Base curb weight

This is the weight of the vehicle includinga full tank of fuel and all standard equip-ment. It does not include passengers,cargo, or optional equipment.

E160200AUN

E160300AUN

Cargo weight

This figure includes all weight added tothe Base Curb Weight, including cargoand optional equipment.

E160400AUN

GAW (Gross axle weight)

This is the total weight placed on eachaxle (front and rear) - including vehicle

curb weight and all payload.

E160500AUN

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weightthat can be carried by a single axle (frontor rear). These numbers are shown onthe compliance label.The total load on each axle must neverexceed its GAWR.

E160700AUN-EU

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight ofthe fully loaded vehicle (including alloptions, equipment, passengers andcargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-tification label located on the driver’sdoor sill.

VEHICLE WEIGHT



5 51

E160200AUN

Vehicle curb weight

This is the weight of your new vehiclewhen you picked it up from your dealerplus any aftermarket equipment.

E160600AUN

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actualCargo Weight plus passengers.

6

Road warning / 6-2

In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2

If the engine will not start / 6-3

Emergency starting / 6-4

If the engine overheats / 6-6

If you have a flat tire / 6-7

Towing / 6-15





ROAD WARNING

F010100AUN

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher serves as awarning to other drivers to exerciseextreme caution when approaching,overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergencyrepairs are being made or when the vehi-cle is stopped near the edge of a road-way.

Depress the flasher switch with the igni-tion switch in any position. The flasherswitch is located in the center consoleswitch panel. All turn signal lights willflash simultaneously.

The hazard warning flasher operateswhether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when thehazard flasher is on.

• Care must be taken when using thehazard warning flasher while the vehi-cle is being towed.

F020100AUN-EU

If the engine stalls at a crossroador crossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad orcrossing, set the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position and then push the vehi-cle to a safe place.

F020200APB

If you have a flat tire while driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedaland let the vehicle slow down whiledriving straight ahead.Do not apply thebrakes immediately or attempt to pulloff the road as this may cause a loss ofcontrol. When the vehicle has sloweddown to such a speed that it is safe todo so, brake carefully and pull off the

road Drive off the road as far as possi-bl d k fi l l d If

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

WHILE DRIVING

OTD061001N



26

road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on a firm level ground. Ifyou are on a divided highway, do notpark in the median area between thetwo traffic lanes.

2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn onyour emergency hazard flashers, setthe parking brake and put the transaxlein P (automatic transaxle) or reverse(manual transaxle).


3.Have all passengers get out of thevehicle. Be sure they all get out on theside of the vehicle that is away fromtraffic.

4.When changing a flat tire, follow theinstruction provided later in this sec-tion.

F020300AHM

If engine stalls while driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Try to start the engine again. If yourvehicle will not start, contact anauthorized KIA dealer or seek otherqualified assistance.

F030100APB

If the engine doesn't turn over orturns over slowly

1. If your vehicle has an automatictransaxle, be sure the shift lever is in N(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-gency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to besure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light

dims or goes out when you operate thestarter, the battery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to besure they are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to startit. See instructions for "Jump starting".

F030200AHM

If engine turns over normally butdoes not start

1. Check fuel level.

2. With the ignition switch in the LOCKposition, check all connectors at theignition coil and spark plugs.Reconnect any that may be discon-nected or loose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-

partment.4. If the engine still does not start, call an

authorized KIA dealer or seek otherqualified assistance.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

WARNINGIf the engine will not start, do notpush or pull the vehicle to start it.

This could result in a collision orth d g I dditi



6 3

This could result in a collision orcause other damage. In addition,push or pull starting may cause thecatalytic converter to overload andcreate a fire hazard.


EMERGENCY STARTING

F040000AUN

Connect cables in numerical order anddisconnect in reverse order.

F040100AHM-U1

Jump starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if doneincorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm toyourself or damage to your vehicle orbattery, follow these jump starting proce-dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-mend that you have a competent techni-cian or towing service jump start yourvehicle.

CAUTIONUse only a 12-volt jumper system.You can damage a 12-volt starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24-volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro-duces hydrogen gas which mayexplode if exposed to flame orsparks.

If these instructions are not fol-lowed exactly, serious personalinjury and damage to the vehicle

may occur! If you are not surehow to follow this procedure,seek qualified assistance.Automobile batteries contain sul-furic acid. This is poisonous andhighly corrosive. When jumpstarting, wear protective glassesand be careful not to get acid onyourself, your clothing or on thevehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start the

vehicle if the discharged batteryis frozen or if the electrolyte levelWARNING Battery

1VQA4001

Discharged battery

Jumper Cables

Booster battery

(-)

(+)

(+)(-)



46

vehicle if the discharged batteryis frozen or if the electrolyte levelis low; the battery may rupture orexplode.

WARNING - BatteryNever attempt to check the elec-trolyte level of the battery as thismay cause the battery to rupture orexplode causing serious injury.


F040101AUN

Jump starting procedure

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-volt and that its negative terminal isgrounded.

2. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not allow the vehicles totouch.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electricalloads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exactsequence shown in the illustration.First connect one end of a jumpercable to the positive terminal of thedischarged battery (1), then connectthe other end to the positive terminalon the booster battery (2).

Proceed to connect one end of theother jumper cable to the negative ter-minal of the booster battery (3), thenthe other end to a solid, stationary,metallic point (for example, the engine

Do not allow the jumper cables to con-tact anything except the correct batteryterminals or the correct ground. Do notlean over the battery when makingconnections.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with thebooster battery and let it run at 2,000rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-cle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, you should have your vehicle checked by an authorized KIA dealer.

F040200AUN

Push-starting

Your manual transaxle-equipped vehicleshould not be push-started because itmight damage the emission control sys-tem.

Vehicles equipped with automatictransaxle cannot be push-started.

Follow the directions in this section for jump-starting.

WARNINGNever tow a vehicle to start itbecause the sudden surge forwardwhen the engine starts could causea collision with the tow vehicle.

CAUTION - Battery cablesDo not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the booster battery to the negative ter-

minal of the discharged battery.This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing battery acid.



6 5

p ( p , glifting bracket) away from the battery(4). Do not connect it to or near anypart that moves when the engine iscranked.

cle checked by an authorized KIA dealer.


IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATSF050000ATD

If your temperature gauge indicates over-heating, you will experience a loss ofpower, or hear loud pinging or knocking,the engine is probably too hot. If this hap-pens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as itis safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P (automatic

transaxle) or neutral (manualtransaxle) and set the parking brake. Ifthe air conditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out underthe vehicle or steam is coming outfrom underneath the hood, stop theengine. Do not open the hood until thecoolant has stopped running or thesteaming has stopped. If there is novisible loss of engine coolant and nosteam, leave the engine running andcheck to be sure the engine coolingfan is operating. If the fan is not run-

5. If the water pump drive belt is brokenor engine coolant leaks, stop theengine immediately and call the near-

est authorized KIA dealer for assis-tance.

6.If you cannot find the cause of theoverheating, wait until the engine tem-perature has returned to normal.Then,if coolant has been lost, carefully addcoolant to the reservoir to bring thefluid level in the reservoir up to thehalfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert forfurther signs of overheating. If over-heating happens again, call an author-ized KIA dealer for assistance.

CAUTIONSerious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by an authorized KIAdealer.

WARNINGWhile the engine is running, keephair, hands and clothing away frommoving parts such as the fan anddrive belts to prevent injury.

WARNINGDo not remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. This canallow coolant to be blown out of theopening and cause serious burns.



66

p gning, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drivebelt is missing. If it is not missing,check to see that it is tight. If the drivebelt seems to be satisfactory, check forcoolant leaking from the radiator,hoses or under the vehicle. (If the airconditioning had been in use, it is nor-mal for cold water to be draining fromit when you stop).


IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

F070100ATD

Jack and tools

The spare tire, jack, jack handle andwheel lug nut wrench are stored inthe luggage compartment.

Remove the luggage under tray outof the way to reach the equipment.

(1) Jack handle(2) J k

F070101APB

Jacking instructions

The jack is provided for emergencytire changing only.

To prevent the jack from “rattling”while the vehicle is in motion, store itproperly.

Follow jacking instructions to reducethe possibility of personal injury.

OTD069002L

WARNING - Changing tires• Never attempt vehicle repairs

in the traffic lanes of a publicroad or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-pletely off the road and ontothe shoulder before trying tochange a tire.The jack shouldbe used on firm level ground.If you cannot find a firm levelplace off the road, call a tow-ing service company forassistance.

• Be sure to use the correctfront and rear jacking posi-tions on the vehicle; neveruse the bumpers or any otherpart of the vehicle for jacksupport.

(Continued)



6 7

( )(2) Jack

(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

( )


F070200AFD

Removing and storing the sparetire

Turn the tire hold-down wing boltcounterclockwise.

Store the tire in the reverse order ofremoval.

To prevent the spare tire and toolsfrom “rattling” while the vehicle is in

F070300ATD-EU

Changing tires

1. Park on a level surface and applythe parking brake firmly.

2. Shift the shift lever into R(Reverse) for manual transaxle orP (Park) for automatic transaxle.

3. Activate the hazard warning flash-er

ONF068004

(Continued)

• The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack causing seriousinjury or death. No personshould place any portion oftheir body under a vehicle thatis supported only by a jack;use vehicle support stands.

• Do not start or run the engine

while the vehicle is on thejack.

• Do not allow anyone to remainin the vehicle while it is on thejack.

• Make sure any children pres-ent are in a secure place awayfrom the road and from thevehicle to be raised with thejack.

OED066033



86

from rattling while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.

er.


4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tirefrom the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally oppositethe jack position.

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-terclockwise one turn each, but donot remove any nut until the tirehas been raised off the ground.

1JBA6504 OTD069008

WARNING - Changing a tire• To prevent vehicle movement

while changing a tire, alwaysset the parking brake fully,and always block the wheeldiagonally opposite the wheelbeing changed.

• We recommend that thewheels of the vehicle bechocked, and that no personremain in a vehicle that isbeing jacked.



6 9


7. Place the jack at the front or rear jacking position closest to the tireyou are changing. Place the jackat the designated locations underthe frame. The jacking positionsare plates welded to the framewith two tabs and a raised dot toindex with the jack.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jackand turn it clockwise, raising thevehicle until the tire just clears theground. This measurement isapproximately 30 mm (1 in). Beforeremoving the wheel lug nuts, makesure the vehicle is stable and thatthere is no chance for movement or

slippage.

9. Loosen the wheel nuts andremove them with your fingers.Slide the wheel off the studs andlay it flat so it cannot roll away. Toput the wheel on the hub, pick upthe spare tire, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheelonto them. If this is difficult, tip thewheel slightly and get the top holein the wheel lined up with the top

stud. Then jiggle the wheel backand forth until the wheel can beslid over the other studs.

1JBA6025 OTD069012



106

WARNING - Jack locationTo reduce the possibility ofinjury, be sure to use only thejack provided with the vehicleand in the correct jack position;never use any other part of thevehicle for jack support.


10. To install the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on thestuds and tighten them fingertight.Jiggle the tire to be sure it iscompletely seated, then tightenthe nuts as much as possiblewith your fingers again.

11. Lower the vehicle to the groundby turning the wheel nut wrenchcounterclockwise.

Then position the wrench as shown inthe drawing and tighten the wheel nuts.Be sure the socket is seated complete-ly over the nut. Do not stand on thewrench handle or use an extensionpipe over the wrench handle.

Go around the wheel tightening everynut following the numerical sequenceshown in the image until they are tight.Then double check each nut for tight

OTD069009

WARNINGWheels and wheel covers mayhave sharp edges. Handle themcarefully to avoid possiblesevere injury. Before putting thewheel into place, be sure thatthere is nothing on the hub orwheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,etc.) that prevents with the

wheel from fitting solidlyagainst the hub.

If there is, remove it. If the con-tact of the mounting surfacebetween the wheel and hub isnot good the wheel nuts couldcome loose and cause the lossof a wheel. Loss of a wheel mayresult in loss of control of thevehicle. This may cause serious

injury or death.



6 11

Then double-check each nut for tight-ness. After changing the wheels, havean authorized KIA dealer tighten thewheel nuts to their proper torque assoon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:

9~11 kg.m (65~79 lb.ft)


If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure.If the pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the cor-rect pressure. If it is too high, adjustit until it is correct. Always reinstallthe valve cap after checking oradjusting the tire pressure. If the capis not replaced, air may leak from the

tire. If you lose a valve cap, buyanother and install it as soon as pos-sible.

After you have changed wheels,always secure the flat tire in its placeand return the jack and tools to theirproper storage locations.

To prevent the jack, jack handle,

wheel lug nut wrench and spare tirefrom rattling while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.

CAUTIONYour vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts.Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled - or, if replaced, that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used.

Installation of a non-metric thread nut on a metric stud or vice-versa will not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced.

Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads. Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing

aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.If in doubt, consult an author- i d KIA d l

WARNING - Wheel studsIf the studs are damaged, theymay lose their ability to retainthe wheel.This could lead to theloss of the wheel and a collisionresulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequatespare tire pressure

Check the inflation pressures assoon as possible after installingthe spare tire. Adjust it to thespecified pressure, if necessary.

Refer to “Tires and wheels” insection 8.



126

ized KIA dealer.


F070301AUN-EC

Important - use of compact spare tire (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a com-pact spare tire. This compact sparetire takes up less space than a regu-lar-size tire.This tire is smaller than aconventional tire and is designed fortemporary use only.

The compact spare should be inflat-ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).

✽ NOTICECheck the inflation pressure afterinstalling the spare tire. Adjust it to

the specified pressure, as necessary.

When using a compact spare tire,observe the following precautions:

• Under no circumstances shouldyou exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); ahigher speed could damage thetire.

• Ensure that you drive slowlyenough for the road conditions toavoid all hazards. Any road hazard,such as a pothole or debris, couldseriously damage the compactspare.

• Any continuous road use of this tirecould result in tire failure, loss ofvehicle control, and possible per-sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-mum load rating or the load-carry-ing capacity shown on the sidewallof the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. Thei di i

CAUTION• You should drive carefully

when the compact spare is in use. The compact spare should be replaced by the proper conventional tire and rim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicle is not recommended with more than one compact spare

tire in use at the same time.

WARNINGThe compact spare tire is foremergency use only. Do notoperate your vehicle on thiscompact spare at speeds over80 km/h (50 mph). The originaltire should be repaired orreplaced as soon as is possibleto avoid failure of the spare

possibly leading to personalinjury or death.



6 13

compact spare tire diameter issmaller than the diameter of a con-ventional tire and reduces theground clearance approximately25 mm (1 inch), which could resultin damage to the vehicle.


• Do not take this vehicle through anautomatic car wash while the com-pact spare tire is installed.

• The compact spare tire should notbe installed on the front axle if thevehicle must be driven in snow oron ice.

• Do not use the compact spare tireon any other vehicle because thistire has been designed especiallyfor your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread lifeis shorter than a regular tire.Inspect your compact spare tireregularly and replace worn com-pact spare tires with the same sizeand design, mounted on the samewheel.

• The compact spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the compact spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car compo-nents may occur.

• Do not use more than one compactspare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the com-pact spare tire is installed.



146


TOWING

F080100ATD-EU

Towing serviceIf emergency towing is necessary, wed h i it d b th

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with therear wheels on the ground (without dol-lies) and the front wheels off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-sion components are damaged or thevehicle is being towed with the frontwheels on the ground, use a towing dollyunder the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial towtruck and wheel dollies are not used, thefront of the vehicle should always be lift-

ed, not the rear.

OMC045012

OTD069010

OBH068015

CAUTION• Do not tow the vehicle backwards

dolly



6 15

recommend having it done by an author-ized KIA dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towingprocedures are necessary to preventdamage to the vehicle. The use of wheeldollies or flatbed is recommended.

For trailer towing guidelines information,refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.

with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.


When towing your vehicle in an emer-gency without wheel dollies :

1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-tion.

2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N(Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

F080300ATD-EUEmergency towing

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tem-porarily towed using a cable or chainsecured to the emergency towing hookunder the front (or rear) of the vehicle.Use extreme caution when towing thevehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle tosteer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, the

wheels, axles, power train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.

• Do not use the towing hooks to pull avehicle out of mud, sand or other con-ditions from which the vehicle cannotbe driven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than thevehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles shouldcommunicate with each other frequent-ly.

CAUTIONFailure to place the transaxle shift

lever in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the transaxle.

OHD066005

OMG065013

Front

Rear (if equipped)



166

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by an authorizedKIA dealer or a commercial tow truckservice.


• Before emergency towing, check thatthe hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chainsecurely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it steadilywith even force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do not

pull from the side or at a vertical angle.Always pull straight ahead.

• Use a towing strap less than 5 m(16 feet) long. Attach a white or redcloth (about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) inthe middle of the strap for easy visibili-ty.

• Drive carefully so that the towing strapis not loosened during towing.

CAUTION• Attach a towing strap to the tow-

ing hook.

• Using a portion of the vehicle other than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your vehicle.

• Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provided.

WARNINGUse extreme caution when towingthe vehicle.

• Avoid sudden starts or erraticdriving maneuvers which wouldplace excessive stress on theemergency towing hook and tow-ing cable or chain. The hook andtowing cable or chain may breakand cause serious injury or dam-age.

• If the disabled vehicle cannot bemoved, do not forcibly continuethe towing. Contact an authorizedKIA dealer or a commercial towtruck service for assistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straight aheadas possible.

• Keep away from the vehicle dur-ing towing.

OTD069011



6 17


F080301AUN-EUEmergency towing precautions

• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so thesteering wheel isn’t locked.

• Place the transaxle shift lever in N(Neutral).

• Release the parking brake.

• Press the brake pedal with more forcethan normal since you will havereduced brake performance.

• More steering effort will be requiredbecause the power steering systemwill be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill, thebrakes may overheat and brake per-formance will be reduced. Stop oftenand let the brakes cool off.

F080400ATD

Tie-down hook(for flatbed towing, if equipped)

CAUTION - Automatictransaxle

• If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral. Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC position. Adriver must be in the towed vehi-

cle to operate the steering and brakes.

• To avoid serious damage to the automatic transaxle, limit the vehicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph) and drive less than 1.5 km (1mile) when towing.

• Before towing, check the automatic transaxle fluid leak under your vehicle. If the automatic transaxle fluid is leaking, a

flatbed equipment or towing dolly must be used.

WARNINGDo not use the tie-down hooks fortowing purposes. These hooks aredesigned ONLY for transport tie-

down. If the tie-down hooks areused for towing, the tie-down hooks

f t b ill b d d

OTD069013N



186

or front bumper will be damagedand this could lead to seriousinjury.

7

Engine compartment / 7-2Maintenance services / 7-3

Owner maintenance / 7-4

Maintenance schedule / 7-6

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-21

Engine oil / 7-24

Engine coolant / 7-25

Brake/clutch fluid / 7-28

Power steering fluid / 7-29

Automatic transaxle fluid / 7-30

Washer fluid / 7-30Parking brake / 7-31

Air cleaner / 7-31

Climate control air filter / 7-32

Wiper blades / 7-32

Battery / 7-34

Tires and wheels / 7-37Fuses / 7-50

Maintenance



Appearance care / 7-59

Emission control system / 7-65

Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake/clutch* fluid reservoir4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Positive battery terminal

7. Negative battery terminal

8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

9. Radiator cap

10. Engine oil dipstick

11. Power steering fluid reservoir*

* : if equipped



27

OTD071055N-1

B010000ATD

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES

G020000AUNYou should exercise the utmost care toprevent damage to your vehicle andinjury to yourself whenever performingany maintenance or inspection proce-dures.

Should you have any doubts concerningthe inspection or servicing of your vehi-cle, we strongly recommend that youhave an authorized KIA dealer performthis work.

An authorized KIA dealer has factory-trained technicians and genuine KIAparts to service your vehicle properly. Forexpert advice and quality service, see anauthorized KIA dealer.

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficientservicing may result in operational prob-lems with your vehicle that could lead tovehicle damage, an accident, or person-al injury.

G020100AUN-EUOwner’s responsibility

✽ NOTICEMaintenance Service and RecordRetention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that showproper maintenance has been performedon your vehicle in accordance with the

scheduled maintenance service chartsshown on the following pages.You needthis information to establish your compli-ance with the servicing and maintenancerequirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is providedin your Warranty & Consumer Informationmanual.

Repairs and adjustments required as aresult of improper maintenance or a lackof required maintenance are not covered.

We recommend you have your vehiclemaintained and repaired by an author-ized KIA dealer. An authorized KIA deal-

G020200ATDOwner maintenance precautions

Improper or incomplete service mayresult in problems. This section givesinstructions only for the maintenanceitems that are easy to perform.

As explained earlier in this section, sev-eral procedures can be done only by anauthorized KIA dealer with special tools.

✽NOTICEImproper owner maintenance during

the warranty period may affect warran-ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-rate Warranty & Consumer Informationmanual provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing ormaintenance procedure, have it done byan authorized KIA dealer.



7 3

ized KIA dealer. An authorized KIA dealer meets KIA’s high service quality stan-dards and receives technical supportfrom KIA in order to provide you with ahigh level of service satisfaction.

Maintenance

G030000AUNThe following lists are vehicle checks andinspections that should be performed bythe owner or an authorized KIA dealer atthe frequencies indicated to help ensuresafe, dependable operation of your vehi-cle.

Any adverse conditions should bebrought to the attention of your dealer assoon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance Checks are

generally not covered by warranties andyou may be charged for labor, parts andlubricants used.

Owner maintenance scheduleG030101AHM

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check the coolant level in coolantreservoir.

• Check the windshield washer fluidlevel.

• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

WARNING - Maintenancework

• Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous. Youcan be seriously injured whileperforming some maintenanceprocedures. If you lack sufficientknowledge and experience or theproper tools and equipment to dothe work, have it done by an

authorized KIA dealer.• Working under the hood with the

engine running is dangerous. Itbecomes even more dangerouswhen you wear jewelry or looseclothing. These can becomeentangled in moving parts andresult in injury. Therefore, if youmust run the engine while work-ing under the hood, make certainthat you remove all jewelry (espe-

cially rings, bracelets, watches,and necklaces) and all neckties,scarves, and similar loose cloth-

OWNER MAINTENANCE

WARNINGBe careful when checking yourengine coolant level when theengine is hot. Scalding hot coolantand steam may blow out underpressure. This could cause burnsor other serious injury.



47

scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near theengine or cooling fans.

Maintenance

G030102ATDWhile operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of theexhaust or any smell of exhaust fumesin the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steeringwheel. Notice any increased steeringeffort or looseness in the steeringwheel, or change in its straight-aheadposition.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns

slightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-eling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check forunusual sounds, pulling to one side,increased brake pedal travel or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the oper-ation of your transaxle occurs, checkthe transaxle fluid level.

• Check the automatic transaxle P (Park)function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle

G030103AHMAt least monthly:

• Check the coolant level in the enginecoolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exteriorlights, including the stoplights, turn sig-nals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of alltires including the spare.

G030104AHM

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall) :

• Check the radiator, heater and air con-ditioning hoses for leaks or damage.

• Check the windshield washer sprayand wiper operation. Clean the wiperblades with clean cloth dampened withwasher fluid.

• Check the headlight alignment.

• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function

G030105ATDAt least once a year :

• Clean the body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate the door hinges and checks,and hood hinges.

• Lubricate the door and hood locks andlatches.

• Lubricate the door rubber weather-strips.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Check the power steering fluid level.• Inspect and lubricate automatictransaxle linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake/clutch fluid level.



7 5

(water dripping from the air condition-ing system during or after use is nor-mal).

and function.

• Check for worn tires and loose wheellug nuts.

Maintenance

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule ifthe vehicle is usually operated wherenone of the following conditions apply. Ifany of the following conditions apply, fol-low Maintenance Under Severe UsageConditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions or sandyareas.

• Extensive use of brakes.

• Driving in areas where salt or othercorrosive materials are being used.

• Driving on rough or muddy roads.

• Driving in mountainous areas.

• Extended periods of idling or lowspeed operation.

• Driving for a prolonged period in coldtemperatures and/or extremely humidclimates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy citytraffic during hot weather above 32°C

(90°F).

If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect,replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal Maintenance Schedule.After 120 months or 240,000 km (150,000 miles) continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.



67

Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEThe following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for allvehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both kilometrage and time are shown, the frequency of service is deter-mined by whichever occurs first.

24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months

❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear

(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter

❑ Inspect power steering fluid and lines (if equipped)

(Continued)

❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler

❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers

❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads

❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,

upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped)

❑ Replace engine oil and filter(24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)

❑ Inspect battery condition

❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections

❑ Inspect clutch (if equipped) and brake pedal free play

❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks

❑ Add fuel additive *3 (24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)





❑ Inspect vacuum hose





❑ Add fuel additive *3 (12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)

*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-ommended. Additives are available from your authorized KIA dealer along



7 7


❑ Inspect power steering pump, belt and hoses (if equipped)


❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant

❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections (including booster)

❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots

(Continued)

with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Maintenance


❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear(Every 12,000 km or 12 months)



❑ Replace engine oil and filter

(36,000 km (22,500 miles) or 36 months)

❑ Inspect add fuel additive (12,000 or 12 months) * 3

❑ Inspect battery condition❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections


NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)




❑ Inspect brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid

❑ Inspect brake lines, hoses and connections (including booster)❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots


(Continued)




❑ Inspect parking brake


upper arm ball joint

❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts

❑ Inspect vacuum hose❑ Replace air cleaner filter









*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but peri-odic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on



87



❑ Inspect fuel filter *1

❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, canister, fuel lines, fuel hoses, connections

and vapor hose

❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1

(Continued)

fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restric-tion, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filterimmediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorizedKIA dealer for details.

*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-ommended. Additives are available from your authorized KIA dealer alongwith information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

Maintenance

(Continued)


❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint,upper arm ball joint





(72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 72 months)❑ Inspect add fuel additive (12,000 or 12 months) * 3









❑ Inspect brake lines hoses and connections (including booster)

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 30 months









❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)(Every 60,000 km or 48 months)




7 9







(Continued)

Maintenance
















❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers❑ Inspect power steering fluid and lines (if equipped)









and vapor hose

(Continued)



7

*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free butperiodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule dependson fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flowrestriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuelfilter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult anauthorized KIA dealer for details.


10

Maintenance

(Continued)



❑ Inspect valve clearance *2

❑ Replace air cleaner filter




❑Inspect drive belt *

4

(First, 96,000 km or 72 months

after every 24,000 km or 24 months)






*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free butperiodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends

on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flowrestriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuelfilter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult anauthorized KIA dealer for details.

*2 I t f i t t i d/ i ib ti d dj t if




7 11

*2 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if nec-essary.


*4 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reducedexcessively.

Maintenance

(Continued)






❑ Inspect drive belt *4

(First, 96,000 km or 72 monthsafter every 24,000 km or 24 months)





❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)





















*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-ommended. Additives are available from your authorized KIA dealer along

with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.*4 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reducedexcessively.



127






(Continued)

Maintenance






❑ Replace engine oil and filter (132,000 km (82,500 miles) or 132 months)















(Continued)








❑ Replace engine oil and filter (144,000 km (90,000 miles) or 144 months)








*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free butperiodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule dependson fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flowrestriction surging loss of power hard starting problem etc replace the fuel



7 13

❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, canister, fuel lines, fuel hoses, connectionsand vapor hose




(Continued)

restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuelfilter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an author-ized KIA dealer for details.



Maintenance



















(Continued)






❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)










147

p p p






(Continued)

Maintenance







❑Inspect battery condition



❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)









(Continued)









❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap

❑ Inspect valve clearance *2



❑ Replace engine coolant *5 (First, 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or120 months after every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)

(Continued)

*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free butperiodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule dependson fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flowrestriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuelfilter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an author-ized KIA dealer for details.



15




❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, canister, fuel lines, fuel hoses, connectionsand vapor hose

(Continued)

ized KIA dealer for details.

*2 : Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if nec-essary.


*5 : When replacing coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicleand never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An impropercoolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

7

Maintenance









(Continued)













167

Maintenance









❑Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler









(216,000 km (135,000 miles) or 216 months)❑ Inspect drive belt *4

(First, 96,000 km or 72 monthsafter every 24 000 km or 24 months)







❑Inspect battery condition







7 17

after every 24,000 km or 24 months)






Maintenance








❑Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers



and vapor hose







upper arm ball joint❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts



(Continued)

❑ Replace engine coolant *5 (First, 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or120 months after every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)







❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)(Every 60,000 km or 48 months)



No check, No service required

❑ Automatic transaxle fluid

*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free butperiodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule dependson fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow

restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuelfilter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an author-ized KIA dealer for details.

*3 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is rec-



187





(Continued)

ommended. Additives are available from your authorized KIA dealer alongwith information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.


*5 : When replacing coolant, use only a qualified coolant additive for your vehicleand never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An impropercoolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONSThe following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chartbelow for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEMMAINTENANCE

OPERATIONMAINTENANCE INTERVALS

DRIVING

CONDITION

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R EVERY 6,000 km OR 6 MONTHSA, B, C, D, E, F,

G, H, I, K

AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY B, H

FRONT BRAKE DISC/PADS, CALIPERS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

REAR BRAKE DISC/PADS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWERARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BSALL JOINT

I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I



7 19

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I EVERY 12,000 km OR 6 MONTHS C, D, E, F, G

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCEOPERATION

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVINGCONDITION

MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID* R EVERY 120,000 km A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID* R EVERY 90,000 km A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving shorts distanse of less than 8 km in normal tem-

perature or less than 16 km in freezing temperatureB - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread

roads

D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very

cold weather

E - Driving in sandy areas

F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C (90°F)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road

H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack

I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing

J - Driving over 170 km/h

K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

* : if equipped



207

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMSG050100AHM

Engine oil and filter

The engine oil and filter should bechanged at the intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. If the vehicle isbeing driven in severe conditions, morefrequent oil and filter changes arerequired.

G050200AUN

Drive belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence ofcuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-ration and replace if necessary. Drivebelts should be checked periodically forproper tension and adjusted as neces-sary.

G050400ATD

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nections for leakage and damage. Havean authorized KIA dealer replace anydamaged or leaking parts immediately.

G050600AUN

Vapor hose and fuel filler cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap shouldbe inspected at those intervals specifiedin the maintenance schedule. Make surethat a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap iscorrectly replaced.

G050700AUN

Vacuum crankcase ventilationhoses (if equipped)

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidenceof heat and/or mechanical damage. Hardand brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-cate deterioration. Particular attentionshould be paid to examine those hosesurfaces nearest to high heat sources,such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure thatthe hoses do not come in contact withany heat source, sharp edges or movingcomponent which might cause heat dam-age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hoseconnections, such as clamps and cou-plings, to make sure they are secure, andthat no leaks are present. Hoses shouldbe replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.



7 21

Maintenance

G050800AUN

Air cleaner filter

A Genuine KIA air cleaner filter is recom-mended when the filter is replaced.

G050900AUN

Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs ofthe correct heat range.

G051000AHMValve clearance (if equipped)

Inspect for excessive valve noise and/orengine vibration and adjust if necessary.An authorized KIA dealer should performthe operation.

G051100AHM

Cooling system

Check the cooling system components,

such as the radiator, coolant reservoir,hoses and connections for leakage anddamage. Replace any damaged parts.

G051200AUN

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenanceschedule.

G051300AUN

Manual transaxle fluid(if equipped)

Inspect the manual transaxle fluidaccording to the maintenance schedule.

Automatic transaxle fluid(if equipped)

Automatic transaxle fluid should not bechecked under normal usage conditions.

But in severe conditions, the fluid shouldbe changed at an authorized KIA dealerin accordance to the scheduled mainte-nance at the beginning of this chapter.

✽ NOTICEAutomatic transaxle fluid color is basi-cally red.As the vehicle is driven, the automatic

G051500AUN

Brake hoses and linesVisually check for proper installation,chafing, cracks, deterioration and anyleakage. Replace any deteriorated ordamaged par ts immediately.

G051600AAM

Brake/Clutch (if equipped) fluid

Check the brake fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir. The level should be

between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on theside of the reservoir. Use only hydraulicbrake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT4 specification.

CAUTION - Specified fluidThe use of a non-specified fluid could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.

Use only specified automatic transaxle fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)



227

,transaxle fluid will begin to look darker.This is a normal condition and youshould not judge the need to replace thefluid based upon the changed color.

G051700ATD

Parking brake

Inspect the parking brake system includ-ing the parking brake lever and cables.

Maintenance

G051800APA

Rear brake drums and linings(if equipped)

Check the rear brake drums and liningsfor scoring, burning, leaking fluid, brokenparts, and excessive wear.

G051900ATD

Brake pads, calipers and rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discsfor run out and wear, and calipers for fluidleakage.

G052100AUN

Suspension mounting bolts

Check the suspension connections forlooseness or damage. Retighten to thespecified torque.

G052200AUN

Steering gear box, linkage &boots/lower arm ball joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off,check for excessive free-play in thesteering wheel.

Check the linkage for bends or damage.Check the dust boots and ball joints fordeterioration, cracks, or damage.Replace any damaged parts.

G052400AUN

Drive shafts and boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clampsfor cracks, deterioration, or damage.Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-essary, repack the grease.

G052500AUN

Air conditioning refrigerant(if equipped)

Check the air conditioning lines and con-nections for leakage and damage.

G052300AEN

Power steering pump, belt andhoses (if equipped)

Check the power steering pump andhoses for leakage and damage. Replaceany damaged or leaking parts immedi-ately. Inspect the power steering belt (ordrive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks,excessive wear, oiliness and proper ten-sion. Replace or adjust it if necessary.



7 23

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL

G060100ATD

Checking the engine oil level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.

2. Start the engine and allow it to reachnormal operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a fewminutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil toreturn to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, andreinsert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and checkthe level.The level should be betweenF and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bringthe level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil frombeing spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)

WARNING - Radiator hoseBe very careful not to touch theradiator hose when checking oradding the engine oil as it may behot enough to burn you.

OTD079002 OTD079004

CAUTIONDo not overfill the engine oil. It may damage the engine



247

damage the engine.

Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANTG060200AHM

Changing the engine oil and filter

Have engine oil and filter changed by anauthorized KIA dealer according to theMaintenance Schedule at the beginningof this section.

G070000APB

The high-pressure cooling system has areservoir filled with year-round antifreezecoolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-tory.

Check the antifreeze protection andcoolant level at least once a year, at thebeginning of the winter season, andbefore traveling to a colder climate.

G070100ATD

Checking the coolant level

WARNINGRemoving radiatorcap

• Never attempt to remove the radi-ator cap while the engine is oper-ating or hot. Doing so might lead

to cooling system and enginedamage. Also, hot coolant orsteam could cause serious per-sonal injury.

(C ti d)

(Continued)• Turn the engine off and wait until

it cools down. Use extreme carewhen removing the radiator cap.Wrap a thick towel around it, andturn it counterclockwise slowly tothe first stop. Step back while thepressure is released from thecooling system. When you aresure all the pressure has beenreleased, press down on the cap,

using a thick towel, and continueturning counterclockwise toremove it.

• Even if the engine is not operat-ing, do not remove the radiatorcap or the drain plug while theengine and radiator are hot. Hotcoolant and steam may still blowout under pressure, causing seri-ous injury.

WARNINGUsed engine oil may cause skin irri-tation or cancer if left in contactwith the skin for prolonged periodsof time. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancerin laboratory animals. Always pro-tect your skin by washing yourhands thoroughly with soap andwarm water as soon as possibleafter handling used oil.



7 25

(Continued)

Maintenance

Check the condition and connections ofall cooling system hoses and heaterhoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-rated hoses.

The coolant level should be filledbetween F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks onthe side of the coolant reservoir when theengine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

specified coolant to provide protectionagainst freezing and corrosion. Bring thelevel to F (MAX), but do not overfill. If fre-quent coolant addition is required, see anauthorized KIA dealer for a cooling sys-

G070101AHM-EU

Recommended engine coolant

• Use only soft (destilled) water in thecoolant mixture.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-minum engine parts and must be pro-tected by an ethylene-glycol-basedcoolant to prevent corrosion and freez-ing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanolcoolant or mix them with the specified

coolant.• Do not use a solution that contains

more than 60% antifreeze or less than35% antifreeze, which would reducethe effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-lowing table.

OTD079050L

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

Antifreeze Water

WARNINGThe electric motor (cool-ing fan) is controlled byengine coolant tempera-ture, refrigerant pres-sure and vehicle speed.

It may sometimes operate evenwhen the engine is not running.Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fanso that you are not injured by arotating fan blades. As the enginecoolant temperature decreases, theelectric motor will automaticallyshut off.This is a normal condition.



267

g ytem inspection. -15°C (5°F) 35 65

-25°C (-13°F) 40 60

-35°C (-31°F) 50 50

-45°C (-49°F) 60 40

Maintenance

G070200ATD

Changing the coolant

Have the coolant changed by an author-ized KIA dealer according to theMaintenance Schedule at the beginningof this section.

WARNINGRadiator cap

Do not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiator arehot. Scalding hot coolant andsteam may blow out under pres-sure causing serious injury.

CAUTIONPut a thick cloth or fabric around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from overflowing into

i t h th lt t

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility when sprayedon the windshield and may causeloss of vehicle control or damageto paint and body trim.

OTD071007

OTD072007A

■ Type A

■Type B



7 27

engine parts such as the alternator.

Maintenance

BRAKE/CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID

G080100AAM

Checking the brake/clutch* fluidlevel

Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-odically. The fluid level should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap andadding brake/clutch* fluid, clean the area

around the reservoir cap thoroughly toprevent brake/clutch* fluid contamina-tion.

* if equipped

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX

level. The level will fall with accumulatedmileage.This is a normal condition asso-ciated with the wear of the brake liningsand/or clutch disc (if equipped). If thefluid level is excessively low, have thebrake/clutch* system checked by anauthorized KIA dealer.

Use only the specified brake/clutch* fluid.(Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

OTD079008

WARNING - Brake/clutch*fluid

When changing and addingbrake/clutch* fluid, handle it care-fully. Do not let it come in contactwith your eyes. If brake/clutch* fluidshould come in contact with youreyes, immediately flush them with alarge quantity of fresh tap water.Have your eyes examined by a doc-tor as soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss ofbrake/clutch* fluid

In the event the brake/clutch* sys-tem requires frequent additions offluid, the vehicle should be inspect-ed by an authorized KIA dealer.

CAUTIONDo not allow brake/clutch* fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result.

Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid.A few drops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in your brake/clutch* system can damage



287

brake/clutch* system can damage brake/clutch* system parts.

Maintenance

POWER STEERING FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)

G090100ATD

Checking the power steering fluidlevel

With the vehicle on level ground, checkthe fluid level in the power steering reser-voir periodically. The fluid should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir at the normal tem-perature.

Before adding power steering fluid, thor-oughly clean the area around the reser-voir cap to prevent power steering fluidcontamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX

In the event the power steering system

requires frequent addition of fluid, thevehicle should be inspected by anauthorized KIA dealer.

Use only the specified power steering

fluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricants or capacities" in section 8.)

G090200AEN

Checking the power steeringhose

Check the connections for oil leaks, dam-age and twists in the power steeringhose before driving.

CAUTION• To avoid damage to the power

steering pump, do not operate the vehicle for prolonged periods with a low power steering fluid level.

• Never start the engine when the reservoir tank is empty.

• When adding fluid, be careful that dirt does not get into the tank.

• Too little fluid can result in increased steering effort and/or noise from the power steering system.

• The use of the non-specified fluid could reduce the effectiveness of the power steering system and cause damage to it.

OTD079009



7 29

t e e e s o , add u d to t elevel.

Maintenance

It is recommended that the automatictransaxle fluid should be checked by anauthorized KIA dealer.

In severe conditions, the fluid should bechanged at an authorized KIA dealer inaccordance to the scheduled mainte-nance at the beginning of this chapter.

G120100AUN-U1

Checking the washer fluid level

Check the fluid level in the washer fluidreservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plainwater may be used if washer fluid is notavailable. However, use washer solventwith antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-mates to prevent freezing.

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility when sprayedon the windshield and may causeloss of vehicle control or damageto paint and body trim.

• Windshield washer fluid agents

contain some amounts of alcoholand can be flammable under cer-tain circumstances. Do not allowsparks or flame to contact thewasher fluid or the washer fluidreservoir. Damage to the vehicleor occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poi-sonous to humans and animals.Do not drink and avoid contact-ing windshield washer fluid.

Serious injury or death couldoccur.

OTD079011

WASHER FLUIDAUTOMATIC TRANSAXLEFLUID

CAUTIONThe use of a non-specified fluid

could result in transaxle malfunction and failure.

Use only specified automatic transaxle fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubricants and capacities” in section 8.)



307

Maintenance

PARKING BRAKE

G140100ATD

Checking the parking brake

Check the stroke of the parking brake bycounting the number of “clicks’’ heardwhile fully applying it from the releasedposition. Also, the parking brake aloneshould securely hold the vehicle on a fair-ly steep grade. If the stroke is more orless than specified, have the parking

brake adjusted by an authorized KIAdealer.

Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of 20 kg(44 lbs, 196 N).

G160100AAM-EC

Filter replacement

It must be replaced when necessary, andshould not be washed.

You can clean the filter when inspectingthe air cleaner element.

Clean the filter by using compressed air.

Replace the filter according to the

Maintenance Schedule.If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals.

OTD079014

CAUTION• Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.

• Use a KIA genuine part. Use of nongenuine part could damage the air flow sensor.

OTD059010

AIR CLEANER



7 31

( , )

Maintenance

G170100AUN-EC

Filter inspection

If the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads fora long period, it should be inspectedmore frequently and replaced earlier.When you replace the climate control airfilter, replace it performing the followingprocedure, and be careful to avoid dam-aging other components.

G180100AUN

Blade inspection

✽ NOTICECommercial hot waxes applied by auto-matic car washes have been known tomake the windshield difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield or

the wiper blades with foreign matter canreduce the effectiveness of the wind-shield wipers. Common sources of con-tamination are insects, tree sap, and hotwax treatments used by some commer-cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-ing properly, clean both the window andthe blades with a good cleaner or milddetergent, and rinse thoroughly withclean water.

1JBA5122CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER(IF EQUIPPED)

WIPER BLADES



327

Maintenance

G180200AUN

Blade replacementWhen the wipers no longer clean ade-quately, the blades may be worn orcracked, and require replacement.

G180201AUN

Front windshield wiper blade

1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiperblade assembly to expose the plasticlocking clip.

2. Compress the clip and slide the bladeassembly downward.

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in thereverse order of removal

1LDA5023

CAUTIONDo not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may

chip or crack the windshield.

1JBA7037

1JBA7038

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

CAUTIONThe use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.



7 33

reverse order of removal.

Maintenance

BATTERY

G190100ATD

For best battery service

• Keep the battery securely mounted.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connectionsclean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from thebattery immediately with a solution of

water and baking soda.• If the vehicle is not going to be used for

an extended time, disconnect the bat-tery cables.

WARNING - Batterydangers

Always read the followinginstructions carefully whenhandling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes andall other flames or sparksaway from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com-bustible gas, is alwayspresent in battery cells andmay explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of thereach of children becausebatteries contain highlycorrosive SULFURIC ACID.Do not allow battery acid tocontact your skin, eyes,clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)

(Continued)If any electrolyte gets intoyour eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water for at least15 minutes and get immedi-ate medical attention.

If electrolyte gets on yourskin, thoroughly wash thecontacted area. If you feel apain or a burning sensa-tion, get medical attention

immediately.

Wear eye protection whencharging or working near abattery. Always provideventilation when working inan enclosed space.

An inappropriately disposedbattery can be harmful tothe environment and humanhealth. Dispose the battery

according to your locallaw(s) or regulation.

(Continued)

OTD079019

Pb



347

Maintenance

G190200AUN

Battery rechargingYour vehicle has a maintenance-free,calcium-based battery.

• If the battery becomes discharged in ashort time (because, for example, theheadlights or interior lights were left onwhile the vehicle was not in use),recharge it by slow charging (trickle)for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually discharges

because of high electric load while thevehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

(Continued)The battery contains lead.Donot dispose of it after use.Please return the battery toan authorized KIA dealer tobe recycled.

• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-tery, excessive pressure on thecase may cause battery acid toleak, resulting in personal injury.Lift with a battery carrier or with

your hands on opposite corners.• Never attempt to recharge the

battery when the battery cablesare connected.

• The electrical ignition systemworks with high voltage. Nevertouch these components with theengine running or the ignitionswitched on.

Failure to follow the above warn-ings can result in serious bodily

injury or death.

CAUTION• When you don’t use the vehicle

for a long time in the low temperature area, separate the battery and keep it indoors.

• Always charge the battery fully to prevent battery case damage in low temperature area.

• If you use unauthorized electronic devices, the battery may be discharged. Never use unauthorized

devices.

WARNINGSeparating the battery from thevehicle should be done in anauthorized KIA dealer.



7 35

Maintenance

G130300ATD

Reset itemsItems should be reset after the batteryhas been discharged or the battery hasbeen disconnected.

• Auto down window (See section 4)

• Sunroof (See section 4)

• Trip computer (See section 4)

• Climate control system(See section 4)

• Clock (See section 4)

• Audio (See section 4)

(Continued)• Disconnect the battery charger inthe following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger mainswitch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp fromthe negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp fromthe positive battery terminal.

• Before performing maintenanceor recharging the battery, turn off

all accessories and stop theengine.

• The negative battery cable mustbe removed first and installedlast when the battery is discon-nected.

WARNING - Rechargingbattery

When recharging the battery,observe the following precautions:

• The battery must be removedfrom the vehicle and placed in anarea with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charg-

ing, and stop or reduce the charg-ing rate if the battery cells begingassing (boiling) violently or ifthe temperature of the electrolyteof any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).

• Wear eye protection when check-ing the battery during charging.

(Continued)



367

Maintenance

TIRES AND WHEELSG200100AUN

Tire careFor proper maintenance, safety, andmaximum fuel economy, you mustalways maintain recommended tireinflation pressures and stay withinthe load limits and weight distributionrecommended for your vehicle.

G200200AUN-EU

Recommended cold tire inflationpressures

All tire pressures (including thespare) should be checked when thetires are cold. “Cold Tires” means thevehicle has not been driven for atleast three hours or driven less thanone mile (1.6 km).

Recommended pressures must bemaintained for the best ride, top vehi-cle handling, and minimum tire wear.

For recommended inflation pressurerefer to “Tire and wheels” in section8.

All specifications (sizes and pres-sures) can be found on a labelattached to the driver’s side centerpillar.

WARNING - Tire underin-flation

Severe underinflation (10 psi(70 kPa) or more) can lead tosevere heat build-up, causingblowouts, tread separation andother tire failures that can resultin the loss of vehicle controlleading to severe injury ordeath. This risk is much higher

on hot days and when drivingfor long periods at high speeds.OMG055004



7 37

Maintenance

WARNING - Tire inflationOverinflation or underinflationcan reduce tire life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, andlead to sudden tire failure. Thiscould result in loss of vehiclecontrol and potential injury.

CAUTION - Tire pressureAlways observe the following: • Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than 1.6 km (one mile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check

the pressure of other tires.• Never overload your vehicle.

Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn,old tires can cause acci- dents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.

CAUTION• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy.Wheel deformation also is possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by an authorized KIA dealer.

• Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

CAUTION• Warm tires normally exceed

recommended cold tire pressures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be underinflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without

the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.



387

Maintenance

G200300AUN

Checking tire inflation pressureCheck your tires once a month ormore.

Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

G200301AUN-EU

How to check

Use a good quality gage to check tire

pressure.You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by look-ing at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they'reunderinflated.

Check the tire's inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. - "Cold"means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-ly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflationpressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loadinginformation label, no further adjust-ment is necessary. If the pressure islow, add air until you reach the rec-ommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in thecenter of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage. Besure to put the valve caps back onthe valve stems. They help preventleaks by keeping out dirt and mois-ture.

WARNING• Inspect your tires frequently

for proper inflation as well aswear and damage. Always usea tire pressure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too lit-tle pressure wear unevenlycausing poor handling, loss ofvehicle control, and suddentire failure leading to acci-

dents, injuries, and evendeath. The recommended coldtire pressure for your vehiclecan be found in this manualand on the tire label locatedon the driver's side center pil-lar.

• Worn tires can cause acci-dents. Replace tires that areworn, show uneven wear, or

are damaged.• Remember to check the pres-

sure of your spare tire. KIArecommends that you checkthe spare every time youcheck the pressure of the



7 39

check the pressure of theother tires on your vehicle.

Maintenance

G200400AUN-EU

Tire rotationTo equalize tread wear, it is recom-mended that the tires be rotatedevery 12,000 km (7,500 miles) orsooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires forcorrect balance.

When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking orsevere cornering. Look for bumps orbulges in the tread or side of tire.Replace the tire if you find either ofthese conditions. Replace the tire iffabric or cord is visible. After rotation,be sure to bring the front and rear tirepressures to specification and checklug nut tightness.

Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section8.

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated.

✽ NOTICE

Rotate radial tires that have anasymmetric tread pattern only fromfront to rear and not from right toleft.

WARNING• Do not use the compact spare

tire for tire rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-stances. This may causeunusual handling characteris-tics that could result in death,severe injury, or propertydamage.

S2BLA790A

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tire

Directional tires (if equipped)



407

Maintenance

G200500AUN

Wheel alignment and tire balanceThe wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at thefactory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need tohave your wheels aligned again.However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling one wayor the other, the alignment may need

to be reset.If you notice your vehicle vibratingwhen driving on a smooth road, yourwheels may need to be rebalanced.

G200600BHM-EU

Tire replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wearindicator will appear as a solid bandacross the tread.This shows there isless than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of treadleft on the tire. Replace the tire whenthis happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear

across the entire tread before replac-ing the tire.

CAUTIONImproper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator WARNING - Replacingtires

To reduce the chance or seriousor fatal injuries from an acci-dent caused by tire failure orloss of vehicle control:

• Replace tires that are worn,show uneven wear, or aredamaged. Worn tires cancause loss of braking effec-

tiveness, steering control, andtraction.

• Do not drive your vehicle withtoo little or too much pressurein your tires. This can lead touneven wear and tire failure.

• When replacing tires, nevermix radial and bias-ply tireson the same car. You mustreplace all tires (including the

spare) if moving from radial tobias-ply tires.

(Continued)



7 41

Maintenance

G200601AUN

Compact spare tire replacement A compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular size tire.Replace it when you can see thetread wear indicator bars on the tire.The replacement compact spare tireshould be the same size and designtire as the one provided with yournew vehicle and should be mountedon the same compact spare tire

wheel. The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularsize wheel, and the compact sparetire wheel is not designed for mount-ing a regular size tire.

G200700BUN-EC

Wheel replacementWhen replacing the metal wheels forany reason, make sure the newwheels are equivalent to the originalfactory units in diameter, rim widthand offset.

(Continued)• Using tires and wheel otherthan the recommended sizescould cause unusual handlingcharacteristics and poor vehi-cle control, resulting in a seri-ous accident.

• Wheels that do not meet KIA’sspecifications may fit poorlyand result in damage to the

vehicle or unusual handlingand poor vehicle control.

• The ABS works by comparingthe speed of the wheels. Tiresize can affect wheel speed.When replacing tires, all 4tires must use the same sizeoriginally supplied with thevehicle. Using tires of a differ-ent size can cause the ABS(Anti-lock Brake System) andESC (Electronic StabilityControl) (if equipped) to workirregularly.

WARNINGA wheel that is not the correctsize may adversely affect wheeland bearing life, braking andstopping abilities, handlingcharacteristics, ground clear-ance, body-to-tire clearance,speedometer and odometer cal-ibration, headlight aim andbumper height.



427

Maintenance

G200800AHM

Tire tractionTire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that areimproperly inflated or on slipperyroad surfaces. Tires should bereplaced when tread wear indicatorsappear. Slow down whenever thereis rain, snow or ice on the road, toreduce the possibility of losing con-trol of the vehicle.

G200900AUN

Tire maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decreasetire wear. If you find a tire is wornunevenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. Thiswill increase vehicle ride comfort andtire life. Additionally, a tire shouldalways be rebalanced if it is removedfrom the wheel.

G201000AUN

Tire sidewall labeling

This information identifies anddescribes the fundamental charac-teristics of the tire and also providesthe tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. TheTIN can be used to identify the tire incase of a recall.

G201001AUN

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or Brand name isshown.

G201002ATD

2. Tire size designation A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tiresize designation. You will need thisinformation when selecting replace-ment tires for your car. The followingexplains what the letters and num-bers in the tire size designationmean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an

example only; your tire size designa-tor could vary depending on yourvehicle.)

P205/55R16 89H

P - Applicable vehicle type (tiresmarked with the prefix “P’’ areintended for use on passengervehicles or light trucks; however,not all tires have this marking).

205 - Tire width in millimeters.55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of itswidth.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

16 Ri di t i i h

I030B04JM

1

1

23

4

5,6

7



7 43

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

Maintenance

89 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximumload the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See thespeed rating chart in this sectionfor additional information.

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-tant information that you need if youever have to replace one. The follow-ing explains what the letters andnumbers in the wheel size designa-tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.0JX16

6.0 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-ferent speed ratings currently beingused for passenger vehicles. Thespeed rating is part of the tire sizedesignation on the sidewall of thetire. This symbol corresponds to thattire's designed maximum safe oper-ating speed.

G201003AHM

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire Identification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old,based on the manufacturing date,(including the spare tire) should bereplaced by new ones. You can findthe manufacturing date on the tiresidewall (possibly on the inside of thewheel), displaying the DOT Code.The DOT Code is a series of num-bers on a tire consisting of numbersand English letters. The manufactur-ing date is designated by the last fourdigits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means aplant code number, tire size andtread pattern and the last four num-bers indicate week and year manu-

factured.For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1609 representsthat the tire was produced in the 16thweek of 2009.

S 180 km/h (112 mph)

T 190 km/h (118 mph)

H 210 km/h (130 mph)

V 240 km/h (149 mph)

Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)

Maximum SpeedSpeedRating

Symbol



447

Maintenance

G201004AEN

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rub-ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate thematerials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.The letter "R" means radial ply con-struction; the letter "D" means diago

G201005AUN

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflationpressure.

G201006AUN6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

G201007ATD-EC

7. Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder and maxi-mum section width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 440

TRACTION A

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified govern-ment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times (1½) as well on the gov-ernment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditionsof their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in

d h i i d li

WARNING - Tire ageTires degrade over time, evenwhen they are not being used.

Regardless of the remainingtread, we recommend that tiresbe replaced after approximatelysix (6) years of normal service.Heat caused by hot climates orfrequent high loading condi-tions can accelerate the aging

process. Failure to follow thiswarning can result in suddentire failure, which could lead toa loss of control and an acci-dent involving serious injury ordeath.



7 45

struction; the letter D means diago-nal or bias ply construction; and theletter "B" means belted-bias ply con-struction.

road characteristics and climate.

Maintenance

These grades are molded on the

side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.The tires available as standard oroptional equipment on your vehiclesmay vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thosegrades represent the tires ability tostop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spec-ified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction perform-ance.

Temperature -A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel.

Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of perform-ance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

WARNING - TiretemperatureThe temperature grade for thistire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible sudden

tire failure. This can cause lossof vehicle control and seriousinjury or death.

WARNINGThe traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include accelera-tion, cornering, hydroplaning,or peak traction characteristics.



467

Maintenance

G201100AAM-EC

Tire terminology and definitionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outward on thetire. Air pressure is expressed in kilo-pascal (kPa) or pounds per squareinch (psi).

Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional acces-sories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic

transaxle, power seats, and air con-ditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cordsthat is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords that

hold the tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of

air pressure in a tire, measured inkilopascals (kPa) or pounds persquare inch (psi) before a tire hasbuilt up heat from driving.

Curb Weight: This means the weightof a motor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant, but without passengers andcargo.

DOT Markings: The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric des-ignator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the Front Axle.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire, thatmust always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for

air pressure.Load Index: An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 that corre-sponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which acold tire may be inflated. The maxi-mum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The loadrating for a tire at the maximum per-missible inflation pressure for thattire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by 68 kg(150 pounds).

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.



7 47

Maintenance

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side

of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The outwardfacing sidewall bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings onthe inner facing sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tireused on passenger cars and some

light duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-ed tire inflation pressure and shownon the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire andupon which the tire beads are seat-ed.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric

code assigned to a tire indicating themaximum speed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction between thetire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called "wear

bars," that show across the tread of atire when only 2/32 inch of treadremains.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards, a tire informationsystem that provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction, tempera-ture and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testing proce-

dures. The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus therated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the

Tire: Load on an individual tire due tocurb and accessory weight plusmaximum occupant and cargoweight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,accessory weight, and normal occu-pant weight and driving by 2.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-ly attached to a vehicle showing theoriginal equipment tire size and rec-ommended inflation pressure.



487

g gg g

Maintenance

All season tires

KIA specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good per-formance for use all year round,including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All season tires are identifiedby ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mudand Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snowtires have better snow traction thanall season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

KIA specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior perform-ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-formance is substantially reduced insnow and ice. Summer tires do nothave the tire traction rating M+S(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.if you plan to operate your vehicle in

snowy or icy conditions. KIA recom-mends the use of snow tires or allseason tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size andhave the same load capacity as theoriginal tires. Snow tires should beinstalled on all four wheels; other-wise, poor handling may result.

Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4psi) more air pressure than the pres-sure recommended for the standardtires on the tire label on the driver's

side of the center pillar, or up to themaximum pressure shown on the tiresidewall, whichever is less.

Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75mph) when your vehicle is equippedwith snow tires.

Radial-ply tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved treadlife, road hazard resistance andsmoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are ofbelted construction, and are selectedto complement the ride and handlingcharacteristics of your vehicle. Radial-ply tires have the same load carryingcapacity, as bias-ply or bias belted tiresof the same size, and use the same

recommended inflation pressure.Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply orbias belted tires is not recommended.Any combinations of radial-ply andbias-ply or bias belted tires when usedon the same vehicle will seriously dete-riorate vehicle handling. The best ruleto follow is: Identical radial-ply tiresshould always be used as a set of four.

Longer wearing tires can be more sus-

ceptible to irregular tread wear. It isvery important to follow the tire rotationinterval shown in this section toachieve the tread life potential of thesetires. Cuts and punctures in radial-plytires are repairable only in the treadarea because of sidewall flexing



7 49

area, because of sidewall flexing.Consult your tire dealer for radial-plytire repairs.

Maintenance

FUSES

G210000ATD

A vehicle’s electrical system is protectedfrom electrical overload damage byfuses.

This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one locat-

ed in the driver’s side panel bolster, theother in the engine compartment nearthe battery.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-sories, or controls do not work, check theappropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse hasblown, the element inside the fuse willmelt.

If the electrical system does not work,first check the driver’s side fuse panel.

Always replace a blown fuse with one of

the same rating.If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-cates an electrical problem. Avoid usingthe system involved and immediatelyconsult an authorized KIA dealer.

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type,and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

OHDC078019

Normal

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Multi fuse

Blown

Blown

Normal Blown

WARNING - Fuse replace-ment• Never replace a fuse with any-

thing but another fuse of thesame rating.

• A higher capacity fuse couldcause damage and possibly afire.

• Never install a wire instead of theproper fuse - even as a temporaryrepair. It may cause extensive

wiring damage and a possible fire.

CAUTIONDo not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.



507

Maintenance

G210100ATD

Instrument panel fuse replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all otherswitches off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.Use the removal tool provided in theengine compartment fuse panel.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if itis blown.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized KIAdealer.

If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the cigar lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical com-

ponents do not work and the fuses areOK, check the fuse block in the enginecompartment. If a fuse is blown, it mustbe replaced.

OTD079020

Driver’s side panel

OTD079021



7 51

Maintenance

G210101AUN

Memory fuse

Your vehicle is equipped with the memo-ry fuse to prevent battery discharge ifyour vehicle is parked without beingoperated for prolonged periods. Use thefollowing procedures before parking thevehicle for prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.

3. Open the driver’s side panel cover andpull up the memory fuse.

✽ NOTICE

• If the memory fuse is pulled up fromthe fuse panel, the warning chime,audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,will not operate. Some items must bereset after replacement. Refer to“Battery” in this section.

• Even though the memory fuse ispulled up, the battery can still be dis-charged by operation of the head-lights or other electrical devices.

G210200APB

Engine compartment panel fuse replacement

1. Turn the ignition switch and all otherswitches off.

2. Remove the fuse box cover by press-ing the tap and pulling up the cover.

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if itis blown. To remove or insert the fuse,use the fuse puller in the engine com-

partment fuse panel.4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,

and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.If it fits loosely, consult an authorizedKIA dealer.

OMG065008 OTD079023



527

Maintenance

G210201AAM

Multi fuse

If the multi fuse is blown, it must beremoved as follows:

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Remove the fuse panel on the rightside in the engine compartment.

4. Remove the nuts shown in the pictureabove.

5. Replace the fuse with a new one of thesame rating.

6. Reinstall in the reverse order ofremoval.

✽ NOTICE

If the multi fuse is blown, consult anauthorized KIA dealer.

OTD079025

CAUTIONAfter checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse panel cover. If not,electrical failures may occur from water leaking in.



7 53

Maintenance

✽ NOTICENot all fuse panel descriptions in thismanual may be applicable to your vehi-cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.When you inspect the fuse box on yourvehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

Engine compartment fuse panel

OTD079026/OTD079027

G210300ATD-EC

Fuse/Relay panel descriptionInside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relayname and capacity.

Instrument panel fuse panel



547

Maintenance

Instrument panel fuse panel

Fuse Fuse rating Protected componentSTART 10A Transaxle Range Switch (A/T), Ignition Lock Switch (M/T), E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Start Relay)

A/CON SW 10A A/C Control Module (Auto A/C), PCM

MIRR. HTD 10A Driver/ Passenger Power Outside Mirror (Defogger), A/C Control Module (Rear Defogger SW)

S/HTR 15A Front Seat Warmer LH/RH

A/CON 10AE/R Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay), BCM, Incar Temperature Sensor (Auto), Sunroof Control Module,

A/C Control Module

HEAD LAMP 10A E/R Fuse & Relay Box (H/LP (HI/LO) Relay), DRL Control Module

WIPER (FR) 25A Multifunction Switch (Wiper & Washer SW), E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Wiper Relay), Front Wiper Motor

DRL 15A DRL Control Module

FOG LP (RR) 15A -

P/WDW DR 25A Power Window Main Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LH

D/CLOCK 10A Audio, BCM, Clock, Power Outside Mirror Switch

P/OUTLET 15A Power Outlet

DR LOCK 20A Sunroof Control Module, ICM Relay Box (Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Two Turn Unlock Relay)

DEICER 15A ICM Relay Box (Windshield Defogger Relay)

STOP LP 15A Stop Lamp Switch, Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid

ROOM LP 15ATrunk Room Lamp, BCM, Clock, Instrument Cluster (IND.), Data Link Connector, A/C Control Module,

Ignition Key Ill. & Door Warning Switch, Room Lamp, Map Lamp

AUDIO 15A Audio

POWER

CONNECTOR



7 55

Maintenance

Fuse Fuse rating Protected component

TRUNK OPEN 15A Trunk Open RelayPDM 25A -

SAFETY P/WDW 25A -

P/WDW ASS 25A Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch, Rear Power Window Switch RH

P/OUTLET 15A Power Outlet

T/SIG LP 10A Hazard Switch

A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster (IND.)

CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster (IND.), BCM, Electronic Chromic Mirror, Rheostat, Steering Angle Sensor

A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module

IGN1-A 15A PDM, EPMESC Switch, EPS Control Module Control Module

HAZARD LP 15A ICM Relay Box (Hazard Relay), Hazard Switch

TAIL LP (RH) 10ARear Combination Lamp (In/Out) RH, Head Lamp RH, Shunt Connector, Passenger Power Window Switch,

License Lamp RH (4DR), Illuminations, Rheostat Relay (With DRL)

TAIL LP (LH) 10AHead Lamp LH, Rear Combination Lamp (In/Out) LH, Power Window Main Switch,

License Lamp (2DR), License Lamp LH (4DR)



567

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected componentALT 125A Generator, Fuse (MDPS, HTD GLASS, C/FAN, ABS 2, BLOWER, IGN 1, FOG LP (FR), ABS 1)

MDPS 80A EPS Control Module

ABS 2 40A ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module

C/FAN 40A C/Fan LO/HI Relay

BLOWER 40A Blower Relay

HTD GLASS 40A I/P Junction Box (Rear Defogger Relay)

IGN 2 30A Ignition Switch, Start Relay, Button Relay Box (ESCL Relay)

BATT 1 50AI/P Junction Box (Fuse (TAIL LAMP (LH/RH), P/WDW DR, P/WDW ASS, FOG LP (RR)/SSB,

SMK, PDM), Tail Lamp Relay, Power Window Relay)

ABS 1 40A ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module

IGN 1 30A Ignition Switch, Button Relay Box (ESCL Relay (IGN1))

BATT 2 50AI/P Junction Box (Power Connector (AUDIO, ROOM LP LAMP), FUSE (STOP LP, DEICER,

HAZARD LP, DR LOCK, TRUNK OPEN))

ECU 30A Engine Control Relay

FOG LP (FR) 10A Multipurpose Check Connector, Front Fog Relay, Battery Sensor

H/LP HI 20A H/LP (HI) Relay,

HORN 10A Horn Relay

H/LP LO(LH) 10A Head Lamp LH

H/LP LO(RH) 10A Head Lamp RH

SPARE 10A -

SNSR 3 10A ECM, PCM, Vehicle Speed Sensor, Pulse Generator 'A', Stop Lamp Switch

ABS 10A Multipurpose Check Connector, ESC Control Module, ABS Control Module

ECU 3 15A Ignition Coil (#1~#4), Condenser, PCM

MULTI

FUSE

FUSE



7 57

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected component

B/UP LP 10A Inhibitor Switch, Pulse Generater 'B', Back Up Lamp SwitchSPARE 15A -

SPARE 20A -

IGN COIL 20A Condenser (G4KF), Ignition Coil #1~4

SNSR 2 10AOil Control Valve (#1, #2), Camshaft Position Sensor (Intake, Exhaust), F/PUMP Relay,

C/FAN LO Relay, Immobilizer Module

ECU 2 10A PCM, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Oxygen Sensor (Down)

INJECTOR 10AA/CON Relay, Crankshaft Position Sensor, Oxygen Sensor (UP), Injector #1~4,

Variable Intake Sensor

SNSR 1 15A PCM, Canister Close Valve

ECU 1 10A PCMA/CON 10A A/CON Relay

F/PUMP 15A F/FUMP Relay

FUSE



587

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

G230101AUNExterior general caution

It is very important to follow the labeldirections when using any chemicalcleaner or polish. Read all warning andcaution statements that appear on thelabel.

G230102BUN

Finish maintenance

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish fromrust and deterioration, wash it thoroughlyand frequently at least once a month withlukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-ing, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to theremoval of any accumulation of salt, dirt,mud, and other foreign materials. Make

sure the drain holes in the lower edges ofthe doors and rocker panels are keptclear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,industrial pollution and similar depositscan damage your vehicle’s finish if notremoved immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain watermay not completely remove all thesedeposits. A mild soap, safe for use onpainted surfaces, may be used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Donot allow soap to dry on the finish.

WARNING - Wet brakesAfter washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. If

braking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.

CAUTION• Do not use strong soap, chemical

detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure water, water may leak through the windows and wet the interior.

• To prevent damage to the plastic parts and lamps, do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.



7 59

Maintenance

Waxing

Wax the vehicle when water will nolonger bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle beforewaxing. Use a good quality liquid orpaste wax, and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions. Wax all metal trim to protectit and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materialswith a spot remover will usually strip thewax from the finish. Be sure to re-waxthese areas even if the rest of the vehicle

does not yet need waxing.

G230103AUN

Finish damage repair

Deep scratches or stone chips in thepainted surface must be repairedpromptly. Exposed metal will quickly rustand may develop into a major repairexpense.

✽ NOTICEIf your vehicle is damaged and requiresany metal repair or replacement, be surethe body shop applies anti-corrosion

materials to the parts repaired orreplaced.

CAUTION• Water washing in the engine com-

partment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

OJB037800

CAUTION• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts.This

may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.



607

Maintenance

B230104AUN

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use atar remover, not a scraper or othersharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metalparts from corrosion, apply a coating ofwax or chrome preservative and rub toa high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastalareas, cover the bright metal parts witha heavier coating of wax or preserva-

tive. If necessary, coat the parts withnon-corrosive petroleum jelly or otherprotective compound.

G230105ASA

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice andsnow removal and dust control may col-lect on the underbody. If these materialsare not removed, accelerated rusting canoccur on underbody parts such as thefuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaustsystem, even though they have beentreated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbodyand wheel openings with lukewarm orcold water once a month, after off-roaddriving and at the end of each winter.Payspecial attention to these areas becauseit is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. Itwill do more harm than good to wet downthe road grime without removing it. Thelower edges of the doors, rocker panels,and frame members have drain holesthat should not be allowed to clog withdirt; trapped water in these areas cancause rusting.

WARNINGAfter washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.



7 61

Maintenance

G230106AAM

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with aclear protective finish.

• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-ishing compound, solvent, or wirebrushes on aluminum wheels. Theymay scratch or damage the finish.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral deter-gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.Also, be sure to clean the wheels afterdriving on salted roads.This helps pre-

vent corrosion.• Avoid washing the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any cleaners containingacid or acid detergents. It may damageand corrode the aluminum wheelscoated with a clear protective finish.

G230107AHM

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design andconstruction practices to combat corro-sion, we produces vehicles of the highestquality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosionresistance your vehicle can deliver, theowner's cooperation and assistance isalso required.

Common causes of corrosionThe most common causes of corrosionon your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that isallowed to accumulate underneath thevehicle.

• Removal of paint or protective coatingsby stones, gravel, abrasion or minorscrapes and dents which leave unpro-tected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehicleis regularly exposed to corrosive materi-als, corrosion protection is particularlyimportant. Some of the common causesof accelerated corrosion are road salts,dust control chemicals, ocean air andindustrial pollution

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in whichcorrosion is most likely to occur. Forexample, corrosion is accelerated byhigh humidity, particularly when tempera-tures are just above freezing. In suchconditions, the corrosive material is keptin contact with the vehicle surfaces bymoisture that evaporate slowy.

Mud is particularly corrosive because itdries slowly and holds moisture in con-tact with the vehicle. Although the mudappears to be dry, it can still retain themoisture and promote corrosion.

High temperatures can also acceleratecorrosion of parts that are not properlyventilated so the moisture can be dis-persed. For all these reasons, it is partic-ularly important to keep your vehicleclean and free of mud or accumulationsof other materials. This applies not onlyto the visible surfaces but particularly tothe underside of the vehicle.



627

industrial pollution.

Maintenance

To help prevent corrosion

You can help prevent corrosion from get-ting started by observing the following:

Keep your vehicle clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is tokeep your vehicle clean and free of cor-rosive materials. Attention to the under-side of the vehicle is particularly impor-tant.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area —

where road salts are used, near theocean, areas with industrial pollution,acid rain, etc.—, you should take extracare to prevent corrosion. In winter,hose off the underside of your vehicleat least once a month and be sure toclean the underside thoroughly whenwinter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the vehicle,give particular attention to the compo-nents under the fenders and otherareas that are hidden from view. Do athorough job; just dampening the accu-mulated mud rather than washing itaway will accelerate corrosion ratherthan prevent it. Water under high pres-sure and steam are particularly effec-tive in removing accumulated mud andcorrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame members, be

sure that drain holes are kept open sothat moisture can escape and not betrapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poorlyventilated garage. This creates a favor-able environment for corrosion. This isparticularly true if you wash your vehiclein the garage or drive it into the garagewhen it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage cancontribute to corrosion unless it is wellventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon aspossible to reduce the possibility of cor-rosion. If bare metal is showing through,the attention of a qualified body and paintshop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-ly corrosive and may damage paintedsurfaces in just a few hours. Alwaysremove bird droppings as soon as possi-

ble.

Don't neglect the interior

Moisture can collect under the floor matsand carpeting and cause corrosion.Check under the mats periodically to besure the carpeting is dry. Use particularcare if you carry fertilizers, cleaningmaterials or chemicals in the car.

These should be carried only in propercontainers and any spills or leaks should

be cleaned up, flushed with clean waterand thoroughly dried.



7 63

Maintenance

Interior care

G230201AHMInterior general precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as per-fume and cosmetic oil from contactingthe dashboard because they may causedamage or discoloration. If they do con-tact the dashboard, wipe them off imme-diately. See the instructions for the prop-er way to clean vinyl.

G230202AUN

Cleaning the upholstery and interior

trim Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinylwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabricwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean with a mild soap solution recom-

mended for upholstery or carpets.Remove fresh spots immediately with afabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do notreceive immediate attention, the fabriccan be stained and its color can beaffected. Also, its fire-resistant propertiescan be reduced if the material is notproperly maintained.

G230203AUN

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-

bing Clean the belt webbing with any mildsoap solution recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-tions provided with the soap. Do notbleach or re-dye the webbing becausethis may weaken it.

G230204AHM

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-cle become fogged (that is, covered withan oily, greasy or waxy film), they shouldbe cleaned with a glass cleaner. Followthe directions on the glass cleaner con-tainer.

CAUTIONNever allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/ electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

CAUTIONWhen cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol

content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.

CAUTIONUsing anything but recommended

cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric’s appearance and fire- resistant properties.

CAUTIONDo not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.



647

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMG270000AHM-EU

The emission control system of your

vehicle is covered by a written limitedwarranty. Please see the warranty infor-mation contained in the Warranty &Maintenance booklet in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-sion control system to meet all applicableemission regulations.

There are three emission control sys-tems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system(2) Evaporative emission control system

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function ofthe emission control systems, it is rec-ommended that you have your vehicleinspected and maintained by an author-ized KIA dealer in accordance with themaintenance schedule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection andMaintenance Test (With Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-

ing during dynamometer testing,turn the Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system off by pressing theESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is com-pleted, turn the ESC system back onby pressing the ESC switch again.

G270100AUN

1. Crankcase emission controlsystem

The positive crankcase ventilation sys-tem is employed to prevent air pollutioncaused by blow-by gases being emittedfrom the crankcase.This system suppliesfresh filtered air to the crankcase throughthe air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,which then pass through the PCV valveinto the induction system.

G270200AUN

2. Evaporative emission control(including ORVR: OnboardRefueling Vapor Recovery)system

The Evaporative Emission ControlSystem is designed to prevent fuelvapors from escaping into the atmos-phere.

(The ORVR system is designed to allow

the vapors from the fuel tank to beloaded into a canister while refueling atthe gas station, preventing the escape offuel vapors into the atmosphere.)



7 65

Maintenance

G270201AUN

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fueltank are absorbed and stored in theonboard canister. When the engine isrunning, the fuel vapors absorbed in thecanister are drawn into the surge tankthrough the purge control solenoid valve.

G270202AHM

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is con-trolled by the Engine Control Module(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-es so that evaporated fuel is not takeninto the engine. After the engine warmsup during ordinary driving, the PCSVopens to introduce evaporated fuel to theengine.

G270300AUN

3. Exhaust emission controlsystem

The Exhaust Emission Control System isa highly effective system which controlsexhaust emissions while maintaininggood vehicle performance.

G270301AUN

Vehicle modifications

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification of your vehicle could affect

its performance, safety or durability andmay even violate governmental safetyand emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from any modificationmay not be covered under warranty.

G270302AUN

Engine exhaust gas precautions

(carbon monoxide) • Carbon monoxide can be present with

other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if yousmell exhaust fumes of any kind insideyour vehicle, have it inspected andrepaired immediately. If you ever sus-pect exhaust fumes are coming intoyour vehicle, drive it only with all thewindows fully open. Have your vehiclechecked and repaired immediately.

WARNING - ExhaustEngine exhaust gases contain car-bon monoxide (CO). Though color-less and odorless, it is dangerousand could be lethal if inhaled.Follow the instructions on thispage to avoid CO poisoning.



667

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in confinedor closed areas (such as garages) any

more than what is necessary to movethe vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in anopen area for more than a short timewith the engine running, adjust theventilation system (as needed) to drawoutside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-cle for any extended time with theengine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start,excessive attempts to restart theengine may cause damage to theemission control system.

G270303AAM

Operating precautions for catalytic

converters (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyticconverter emission control device.

Therefore, the following precautionsmust be observed:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-line engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle when thereare signs of engine malfunction, suchas misfire or a noticeable loss of per-formance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.Examples of misuse are coasting with

the ignition off and descending steepgrades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idlespeed for extended periods (5 minutesor more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any partof the engine or emission control sys-tem. All inspections and adjustmentsmust be made by an authorized KIAdealer.

• Avoid driving with a extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thecatalytic converter.

Failure to observe these precautionscould result in damage to the catalyticconverter and to your vehicle.Additionally, such actions could void yourwarranties.

WARNING - FireA hot exhaust system can igniteflammable items under your vehi-cle. Do not park, idle or drive thevehicle over or near flammableobjects, such as grass, vegetation,paper, leaves, etc.



7 67

Dimensions / 8-2

Bulb wattage / 8-2

Tires and wheels / 8-3

Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-4

Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-6

Vehicle certification label / 8-6

Tire specification and pressure label / 8-7

Engine number / 8-7

Specifications & Consumer information 8




TIRES AND WHEELS

I020000ATD-EU

*1 Normal load : Up to 3 persons

*2 High speed : above 160 km/h (100 mph)

Front Rear Front Rear

P195/65R15 5.5J×15 220 220 220 220

P205/55R16 6.0J×16 (32) (32) (32) (32)

420 420 420 420T125/80D15 4.0T×15

(60) (60) (60) (60)

P215/45R17 7.0J×17 220 220 220 220(32) (32) (32) (32)

420 420 420 420T125/80D16 4.0T×16

(60) (60) (60) (60)

Full size tire

Compact spare tire

(if equipped)

Compact spare tire

(if equipped)

Wheel lug nut torque

kg·m (lb·ft, N·m)

9~11

(65~79, 88~107)

ItemTire

sizeWheel size

CAUTION

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.

Full size tire

Normal speed/load*1 High speed*2/Maximum load

Cold tire inflation pressure kPa (psi)



8 3


RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIESI040000ATD-EC

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct

lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *1 *2

2.0 Engine 3.9l (4.1 US qt.)(drain and refill, API Service SM*3,

with oil filter)2.4 Engine 4.3l (4.5 US qt.)

ILSAC GF-4 or above

Recommends

Manual transaxle fluid2.0 Engine 1.9l (2.0 US qt.)

API GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill for life)2.4 Engine 1.8l (1.9 US qt.)

2.0 Engine 6.6l (6.9 US qt.)MICHANG ATF SP-IV

Automatic transaxle fluidSK ATF SP-IV

2.4 Engine 7.6l (8.0 US qt.)NOCA ATF SP-IV

KIA genuine ATF SP-IV

Power steering 0.9l (0.9 US qt.) PSF-4

Coolant 6.0l (6.3 US qt.)

Brake/Clutch fluid 0.7~0.8l (0.7~0.8 US qt.) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel 52l (13.7 US gal.) -

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing theamount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time,they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol

base coolant for aluminum radiator)



8 4


I040100ATD-EU

Recommended SAE viscosity

number

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has aneffect on fuel economy and cold weather

operation (engine start and engine oilflowability). Lower viscosity engine oilscan provide better fuel economy and coldweather performance, however, higherviscosity engine oils are required for sat-isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Usingoils of any viscosity other than those rec-ommended could result in engine dam-age.

When choosing an oil, consider the rangeof temperature your vehicle will be oper-

ated in before the next oil change.Proceed to select the recommended oilviscosity from the chart.CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

GasolineEngine Oil *1

°C(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of

a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if

the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper

engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30



8 5


H010000APB

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isthe number used in registering your vehi-cle and in all legal matters pertaining toits ownership, etc.

H010010AAM

VIN label (if equipped)

The VIN is also on a plate attached to thetop of the dashboard.The number on theplate can easily be seen through thewindshield from outside.

H020000AEN

The vehicle certification label attatchedon the dr iver’s (or front passenger’s) sidecenter pillar gives the vehicle identifica-tion number (VIN).

OMG055002

VEHICLE CERTIFICATIONLABEL

OVQ076002N

VIN Label (if equipped)

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

OHD086001



68


H030000APB

The tires supplied on your new vehicleare chosen to provide the best perform-ance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's sidecenter pillar gives the tire pressures rec-ommended for your vehicle.

H04000AUN

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown in the drawing.

OMG055004

OTD089005

ENGINE NUMBERTIRE SPECIFICATION ANDPRESSURE LABEL



8 7

2012 kia forte owner's manual

Documents